JP2021129672A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of preventing mixture of a screw member into a putout part.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a first guidance passage formation part 202 for forming a guidance passage for guiding game balls of a ball tank formation part 201 to a putout device 200; and cover parts (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover one portion of an upper surface of the first guidance passage formation part 202. Predetermined limitation parts (for example, long holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and a recessed part 336) for restricting falling of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 falling onto the cover part onto the first guidance passage formation part 202 are provided in the cover part. Plural specific limitation parts (for example, hole parts 271A to 271H) for restricting movement of screw members falling on the first guidance passage formation part 202 to the putout device 200 are provided in the first guidance passage formation part 202.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 8

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

In a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, a storage unit capable of storing a game medium supplied from a game island installed in a game hall, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out the game medium, and a payout unit. Some have a guide passage forming portion for forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium supplied to the storage portion to the payout portion, and these storage portions and the guide passage forming portion are attached to the game frame by a screw member. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2003-96050

In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion to the game frame, the screw member attached to the inside of the game island, and the like are removed to form the storage portion and the guide passage. If it falls into the section, the screw member will be mixed into the payout device together with the game medium, and the game medium cannot be dispensed normally, the payout device will break down, or the screw member will be the player together with the game medium. There was a problem that it was sometimes paid out.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a screw member from being mixed in a payout portion.

The gaming machine of means 1 is
It is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit gaming state) when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1)
A storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) and a storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201).
A payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out a game medium, and
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion. And the second guide passage forming part 204),
A cover portion (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion.
Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17, are state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part to execute step 100 IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
An update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion that executes step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
With
A predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated hole 316A) for limiting the falling of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion on the cover portion. ~ 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guidance passage forming portion to the payout portion (FIG. 11). , See FIGS. 12 and 27),
The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, shown in FIG. 36-13). As shown in the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 36-17, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). , The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion. In addition, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

Further, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the invention relating to the gaming machine of the following means 2 or means 3. Conventionally, in a gaming machine, the number of special figure games (number of times variable display is executed) executed in a normal gaming state as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-95449 (0058, 0133, etc.) is 1000. When the big hit (advantageous state) does not occur even if the number of times (special number of times) is reached (the special condition is satisfied), the game state is controlled to the probabilistic state, and the probability that the big hit is decided as a result of the special figure game is high. It is increased to about 1/100, and big hits are likely to occur in subsequent special figure games, and even if the number of special figure games (number of times variable display is executed) reaches 1000 in the normal game state, big hits occur. When not, there was something that generated a time saving state instead of a probabilistic state. However, in such a gaming machine, the degree of relief of the player when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the special number is insufficient, and in view of this point, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. There is a demand for the provision of various gaming machines.

The gaming machine of means 2 is
It is possible to execute the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and control the advantageous state (for example, the big hit gaming state) when the specific display result (for example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed. It ’s a gaming machine,
Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17, are state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part to execute step 100 IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and
It is provided with an updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) in which numerical information can be updated based on the execution of the variable display.
The state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, shown in FIG. 36-13). As shown in the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 36-17, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173).
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). , A portion for executing step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine of means 2,
Step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120 is executed as shown in FIG. 36-49 for the predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-49) capable of executing the predetermined suggestion effect (for example, the advance notice effect) when the variable display is executed. Part) and
The background image changes as shown in FIGS. 36-52 (C1) and (C2), for example, a special notification effect for notifying that the control of the special state is started based on the satisfaction of the special condition. , Blackout at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-53 (B), blackout at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-54 (C), etc.) and a special notification effect executing means (for example, , A portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS638), as shown in FIGS. 36-23).
The predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-44, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control CPU 120 in step 108IWS802A. 36-50).
According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised by suddenly executing the special notification effect, and the interest can be improved.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a pachinko game machine. It is a rear view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a left side view which shows the pachinko game machine. It is a top view which shows the frame for the game machine to which the game board is attached. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the pachinko game machine is seen from diagonally behind. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the game board was removed from the game machine frame. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the attachment structure of the passage forming body to the frame for a game machine. It is an enlarged rear view which shows the upper part of the back of the frame for a game machine. (A) is a plan view showing the first passage forming body, and (B) is a rear view showing the first passage forming body. (A) is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10A, FIG. 10B is a sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. 10A, and FIG. (A) is a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of (A). (A) is a plan view showing the first cover body, (B) is a sectional view taken along line EE of (A), and (C) is a sectional view taken along line FF of (A). (A) is a plan view showing a second cover body, (B) is a GG cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is an HF cross-sectional view of (A). (A) is a plan view showing a third cover body, (B) is an I-I cross-sectional view of (A), (C) is a JJ cross-sectional view of (A), and (D) is a third cover body. FIG. 5 (E) is a perspective view showing a ball stopper member. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the first state, and (B) is a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball stop member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view which shows. (A) is a perspective view showing a board mounting frame on which a terminal board is mounted, (B) is a KK cross section of (A), and (C) is an LL cross section of (B). It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the ball tank part on the back surface of a game frame diagonally from the back. (A) is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame, and (B) is a sectional view taken along line MM of (A). It is a perspective view which shows the state which looked at the periphery of the 1st guide passage forming part on the back surface of a game frame obliquely from the back. It is a top view which shows the periphery of the 1st guide passage forming part on the back surface of a game frame. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 21, (B) is a view showing a rotational state of the screw member, and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 21, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. (A) is a staying state of the screw member when the ball fixing member is in the first state, (B) is a TT cross-sectional view of (A), and (C) is a state when the ball fixing member is in the second state. The stagnant state of the screw member, (D), is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU of (C). It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage forming part which shows the moving state of a screw member. It is a vertical cross-sectional view of the 1st guide passage forming part which shows the moving state of the game ball on the cover part. (A) is a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and (B) is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the gaming machine in the feature part 053SG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface in the state which the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in Example 1. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern which branched from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground region formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground region formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection mode of the low voltage component and the high voltage component mounted on the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern around the connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which the game control board in Example 1 is housed in a board case. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board according to the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 1 and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on a solder surface. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the situation where the game control board in Example 1 is attached to a game machine. It is a figure which shows the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. It is a figure which shows the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in relation to the connection of the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit on the solder surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern formed in relation to the connection of the game control microcomputer, the input circuit, and the output circuit on the mounting surface of the game control board in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 5 is a circuit diagram relating to the connection between the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit on the game control board according to the second embodiment. It is a perspective view which shows the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in Example 3, FIG. It is a perspective view from. It is sectional drawing which shows the state which the specific electronic component is soldered to the game control board in Example 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the time saving type determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the time saving type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 108IW. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing in a feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the external output signal. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a state transition diagram for demonstrating the state transition in the feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of the effect control main processing in the feature part 108IW. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example of a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the customer waiting demo production control processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the telop display execution lottery table and the telop mode determination lottery table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows the read-ahead notice setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pre-reading notice effect execution decision table, the pre-reading notice effect type determination table, and the pre-read notice effect mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead notice effect. It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief. It is a flowchart which shows the variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the advance notice effect execution decision table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the effect processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows the waiting process per special figure. This is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the concrete example of the production mode of the time saving rushing appearance effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a concrete example of the production mode of the countdown effect and the effect effect of Gase. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol process processing in the modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows the next fluctuation postponement processing in modification 1. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of the effect at the time of executing the variation display which shortens the relief time in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating modification 2-4 of the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process in Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the advance notice effect execution decision table and the advance notice effect mode determination table in Example 2. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the execution timing of the effect at the time of executing the variation display which shortens the relief time in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shift to the relief time shortening in Example 2. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shifting to the relief time shortening in the modification 1 of the second embodiment. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific example of the effect mode until shifting to the relief time shortening in the modification 2 of the second embodiment.

A mode for carrying out the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

(form)
The gaming machine of Form 1 is
A storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) and a storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201).
A payout unit (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out a game medium, and
A guide passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage or a second guide passage) for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion. And the second guide passage forming part 204),
It is characterized by having.

The gaming machine of the second embodiment is the gaming machine according to the first embodiment.
A cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, a cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, a cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, and a cover portion of the third cover body 330). With 334)
The cover portion restricts the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion from falling to the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). (For example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) are provided for this purpose (see FIGS. 22 and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the third embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second embodiment.
The predetermined limiting portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336) is provided so as to be able to drop from the cover portion without retaining the game medium that has fallen on the cover portion. It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the game medium does not stay in the predetermined limiting portion, and the state in which the screw member can always stay can be maintained. Therefore, the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion falls into the guide passage forming portion. It can be prevented from doing so.

The gaming machine of the fourth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the second or third aspect.
The predetermined limiting portion is a first retaining portion (for example, elongated hole 316A) capable of retaining a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen on the cover portion on the cover portion. ~ 316C) and a second retention portion (for example, recessed grooves 326A to 326C).
The second retention portion is provided at a position closer to the payout portion (for example, the payout device 200) than the first retention portion, and is larger than the first retention portion (L22B> L21).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the screw member tends to stay in the retention portion as it approaches the payout portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from moving and falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the fifth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth embodiments.
The payout portion (for example, a payout device) of a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). A plurality of specific restriction portions (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting the movement to the 200) are provided (see FIGS. 12 and 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the sixth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the fifth embodiment.
The specific limiting portion is a plurality of hole portions (for example, hole portions 271A to 271H).
At least two or more of the plurality of holes have a size capable of dropping the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion before reaching the payout portion. Has (L11> L2, see FIG. 11)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if a screw member is mixed in the guide passage forming portion, it can be dropped from the hole to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, so that the screw member mixed in the guiding passage forming portion is mixed in the payout portion. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game medium from being hindered by the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the seventh embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth embodiment.
The plurality of holes have different sizes.
The largest predetermined hole among the plurality of holes is provided at a position closest to the payout (for example, the left-right dimension L12 of the hole 271H is larger than the left-right dimension of the other holes 271A to 271G. (See Fig. 12)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the screw member can be suitably dropped from the predetermined hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion, it is possible to prevent the screw member dropped into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion. ..

The gaming machine of the eighth embodiment is the gaming machine according to the sixth or seventh aspect.
On the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202), the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330). There is an uncovered area (eg, uncovered area 350) that is not covered by the cover portion 334) of the
At least a part (for example, holes 271B to 271H) of the plurality of specific restriction portions is provided at a position corresponding to the uncovered region in the guide passage forming portion (see FIG. 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the screw member is mixed into the guide passage forming portion from the uncovered region, it can be dropped from the hole portion to the outside of the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the ninth embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) is provided.
The storage unit
It is arranged on the upper surface side of a predetermined portion (for example, the first protruding portion 224) of the game frame.
It is close to or in contact with the upper surface of the predetermined portion so that the screw member does not enter the upper surface of the predetermined portion (see L30 <L1, FIG. 19B).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from entering between the predetermined portion and the storage portion of the game frame and damaging the member.

The gaming machine of the tenth form is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth forms.
A first substrate (for example, a main substrate 11, an effect control substrate 12, etc.) attached at a position lower than the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202).
A second substrate (for example, a terminal substrate 210) attached at a position above the guide passage forming portion,
With
The first board is mounted by a mounting method using a screw member, while the second board is mounted by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member (for example, the board cases 11A, 12A and the like are screw members. The terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a locking means including a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members. (See Fig. 17)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the eleventh form is the gaming machine according to the tenth aspect.
The second board is an external output board (for example, terminal board 210) to which wiring (for example, cable C) for outputting a predetermined signal to the outside of the gaming machine is connected.
The first substrate has a smaller number of wires to be connected than the external output substrate (for example, a plurality of connection hole portions 231 of the terminal substrate 210 as the first substrate provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202). The number of cables C that can be connected to the cable C is the first number (for example, 20), while the second main board 11 and the effect control board 12 provided below the first guide passage forming portion 202 are connected. Each signal line is also connected to the board, but the number is the second number (for example, 10 lines), which is less than the first number.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second board, which has a large number of wires to be connected and is easily subjected to an external force during the wiring connection work, cannot be attached by the screw member, so that the screw member comes off due to the external force applied to the external output board. It is possible to prevent the vehicle from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 12th form is the gaming machine according to the 10th or 11th form.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) and a gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3).
A mounting frame (for example, a board mounting frame 211) for mounting the external output board on the game frame,
With
The mounting frame is characterized by having a mounting frame limiting portion (for example, a recess 242) for restricting the movement of a screw member dropped onto the mounting frame to the guide passage forming portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion by utilizing the mounting frame of the external output substrate.

The gaming machine of the thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth forms.
The guide passage of a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has moved toward the guide passage forming portion around the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202). Special limiting portions (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) are provided to limit the fall to the forming portion (FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), 24. reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 14th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 13th embodiment.
The special restriction portion attaches a screw member (for example, screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16) that has moved toward the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the guide passage forming portion. A special retention portion (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) that can be retained before reaching, and is provided below the screw member attached to the attachment portion.
The screw member that has come off from the attached portion but has not retained in the special retaining portion can move toward the cover portion (see FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member detached from the attached portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion.

The gaming machine of the 15th form is the gaming machine according to the 13th or 14th form.
The special retaining portion is a recess (for example, recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243) capable of accommodating at least a part of the screw member.
The depth of the recess is a depth at which a part of the screw member protrudes when the screw member is housed (see FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member staying in the recess can be easily taken out.

The gaming machine of the 16th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 15th aspects.
A cover portion (for example, a cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) is provided.
The cover portion is provided so as to incline downward toward the payout portion side.
A specific portion (for example, a ball stopper 340) capable of retaining a screw member that has fallen on the cover portion in the cover portion is provided on the payout portion side in the inclined direction of the cover portion (FIG. 15, FIG. 26, FIG. 27)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the form 17 is the gaming machine according to the form 16.
The specific portion (for example, the ball stop member 340) has a first state in which the game medium (for example, the game ball P) of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) can flow down. It is possible to change to a second state in which the game medium of the guide passage forming portion is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down (for example, the rotating portion 341 is located in the upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344. Then, in the first state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, the rotating portion 341 is located at the tilted position, and the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344. The game ball can be brought into contact with the game ball, and can be changed to a second state in which the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot flow down (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204.) ,
When the specific portion is in the second state, the screw member is more likely to stay than in the first state (see FIG. 26).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 18th form is the gaming machine according to the 16th or 17th form.
The cover part
A first cover portion (for example, a first cover portion (for example, elongated holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recessed 336)) capable of retaining a screw member dropped on the cover portion on the cover portion. For example, the cover portion 324 of the first cover body 310, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320),
Unlike the first cover portion, the second cover portion provided with the specific portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) and
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 19th embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 18th aspect.
The second cover portion (for example, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330) is attached by a screw member (for example, screw member N16) having a locking portion (for example, a flange portion F) (FIG. 8). reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 20th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 19th embodiments.
A gaming frame (for example, a gaming machine frame 3) provided with the storage portion (for example, a ball tank forming portion 201) is provided.
The storage portion is attached to the game frame at a plurality of locations by screw members having a locking portion (for example, screw members N11 to N14).
The screw member for attaching the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) to the game frame is such that the screw member falls outside the guide passage forming portion even if it is removed from the game frame. It is installed (see Fig. 8)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member that attaches the storage portion is hard to come off from the game frame, while the screw member that attaches the storage portion and the guide passage forming portion falls out of the guide passage forming portion even if it comes off. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 21st embodiment is the gaming machine according to the 20th embodiment.
A plurality of screw members for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) and the guiding passage forming portion (for example, the first guiding passage forming portion 202) to the gaming frame (for example, the gaming machine frame 3). Of these, a predetermined screw member (for example, screw member N12) near the peripheral edge of the gaming machine is also used as a screw member for attaching a ground wire (for example, ground wire 226) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since the number of screw members can be reduced, it is possible to prevent the screw members that have fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 22nd form is the gaming machine according to the 20th or 21st form.
The screw members (for example, screw members N11 to N14) for attaching the storage portion (for example, the ball tank forming portion 201) to the game frame (for example, the game machine frame 3) are for reinforcing the game frame. It is attached to a metal member (for example, a metal plate 222) (see FIG. 8).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the storage portion can be firmly attached.

The gaming machine of the form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of the forms 20 to 22.
The screw members (for example, screw members N3 to N6) attached to the upper position of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game frame (for example, the gaming machine frame 3) are It is characterized in that it is a screw member different from the screw member having the locking portion.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 24th embodiment is the gaming machine according to any one of the 20th to 23rd embodiments.
A game board (for example, a game board 2) that can be attached to and detached from the game frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) is provided.
In the region below the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) in the game board, the upper portion of the inclined surface (for example, the cover body 220) on which the falling screw member can flow down. Wall portion 220H) is provided (see FIGS. 18 to 20, 27).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen from the guide passage forming portion onto the game board from bouncing and being mixed into the guide passage forming portion again.

The gaming machine of the 25th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 1st to 24th forms.
A cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of the first modification 1) provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202) is provided.
The guide passage forming portion is
A first passage forming portion (for example, a first guide passage forming portion 202) extending so as to incline downward toward one side (for example, the left side), and
A second passage forming portion (for example, a second guide passage forming portion 204) extending downward from the lower end of the first passage forming portion, and
Have,
The cover portion is provided along the first passage forming portion so that the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion moves and falls from the lower end portion to the outside of the guiding passage forming portion (FIG. 29 (FIG. 29). A) See)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion from being mixed into the payout portion.

The gaming machine of the 26th form is the gaming machine according to any one of the 2nd to 25th forms.
Wiring (for example, a cable CH) is provided at a position in the vicinity of the predetermined limiting portion (for example, the recess 361) in the cover portion (for example, the cover portion 360 of the modified example 1) so as to intersect the guide passage forming portion. (See Fig. 29 (B))
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the screw member is easily caught in the wiring and stays in the predetermined limiting portion.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
First, the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the following description, the direction in which the player is located is the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the opposite direction is the rear. Further, the description will be described with reference to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from the player located in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly classified into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. A game area Y is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and hit into the game area Y. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

As shown in FIG. 1, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, and a methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. It is composed of a board surface plate provided with (not shown), a guide rail 2b, and the like, and a spacer member integrally attached to the back surface side of the board surface plate. The game board 2 is formed of a non-transmissive member such as a veneer board in a substantially square shape in front view, and is provided on a board surface board provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 2b, etc. on the front game board surface. May be configured.

A variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinking and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5. A frame-shaped center decorative frame 51 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area), a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, a starting winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 81, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the starting winning opening door is in the closed position, so that the second starting winning opening is used. It is in a closed state where the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning opening is in a closed state). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the starting winning opening door is in the open position when the solenoid 81 is in the on state (second). It is also said that the starting winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device including an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces. Further, when a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the second special figure game may be started.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four locations on the lower left and right sides of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided, which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and has a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for special electric accessory) is off, the big winning door closes the big winning door and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters, for example, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the general winning opening 10.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the lower left of the game area Y). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

Below the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games whose execution is held, by the number of LEDs lit.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area Y, an out port (not shown) is provided to which a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings is taken in.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area Y. Has been done. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (not shown in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the effect is provided.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area Y by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device ( A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) for storing) is provided. Below the upper plate, there is a payout exit where prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full. A hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) may be provided.

A stick controller 31A that can be grasped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, stick controller 31A and push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area Y by the rotation operation of the pachinko game machine 1 by the player on the ball striking operation handle 30. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal drawing game is being executed (when the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41 but the normal drawing game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately). , The game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal symbol game, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal symbol (a common symbol lost symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol lost". When it becomes "per normal drawing", the opening control is performed so that the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period (the second starting winning opening is opened).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (the start prize has occurred). If the special figure game based on the start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a "big hit" and a jackpot symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state.

In the big hit game state, the player can obtain the prize ball by letting the game ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for "big hit". For example, multiple types of opening modes (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) of the big winning opening and game states after the big hit game state (normal state, time saving state, probability change state, etc., which will be described later) are prepared, and the big hit is made according to these. The type is set. As the jackpot type, a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained or a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained may be provided.

In the small hit game state, the large winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in some big hit types (the number of times the big winning opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same. Etc.), the big winning opening is opened. As with the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the "small hit".

After the jackpot game state is completed, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the jackpot type.

In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time-saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

In the probability variation state (probability fluctuation state), in addition to the time saving control, the probability variation control in which the probability that the display result becomes a "big hit" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The probabilistic state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is a state in which a “big hit” is likely to occur in addition to improving the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol.

The time saving state and the probability change state continue until any one of the end conditions such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state are satisfied first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability change, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal drawing game is "normal drawing hit". The pachinko game machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit" returns to a predetermined state after the power is turned on (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when the process is not executed).

The state in which the probability change control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which the probability change control is not executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which the time saving control is executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also called a low base state. By combining these, it is also called a low-accuracy high-base state in the time-saving state, a high-accuracy high-base state in the probabilistic state, and a low-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. The high-accuracy state and low-base state are also called the high-accuracy low-base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state is continuously controlled to the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small hit" (however, "small hit" occurs. If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above number of times cut, the game state is naturally changed). It is not necessary that there is a "small hit" as the display result of the special figure game.

The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, it may be controlled to a probabilistic state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9 It may be turned on or off, the operation of the movable body 32, or an effect using an arbitrary effect device including a part or all of them.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

In the period from the start to the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display of a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination described later. It is a mode in which is continuing.

In addition, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (display result of the special figure game or variable display of the decorative symbol) to be "big hit" (also called big hit reliability or big hit expectation) is determined according to the production mode. Multiple different types of reach effects are performed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has a higher hit reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of variable display of the decorative symbol on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration). The display result of the variable display of the symbol is "big hit"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". ..

In the case of a "probability change jackpot" that is controlled to a probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state, an odd number of decorative symbols (for example, "7") are aligned and displayed as a stop, and the probability change state is entered after the end of the jackpot game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", an even number of decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be aligned and displayed as a stop. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a probabilistic symbol, and the even-numbered decorative symbol is also referred to as a non-probable variable symbol (normal symbol). After the non-probability pattern becomes the reach mode, the promotion effect that finally becomes the "probability big hit" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes "big hit" of some big hit types (big hit type of the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state), and when it becomes "small hit". , A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). If the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a jackpot combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability in the variable display (variable display in which execution is suspended) before execution. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed. It should be noted that the big hit game during the small hit game state and in some big hit types (the big hit type in the big hit game state in the same mode as the small hit game state, for example, the big hit type in which the subsequent game state is a highly accurate state). By executing a common effect depending on the state, the player may not know whether the player is currently in the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, by executing a common effect after the end of the small hit game state and after the end of the big hit game state, it is not possible to distinguish between the high accuracy state and the low accuracy state. You may.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board 37 (see FIG. 3), an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board 91 (see FIG. 3) are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. There is.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not there is a first start prize or a second start prize, and if there is a prize, a random number value for determining a special figure display result, determining a jackpot type, determining a fluctuation pattern, or the like. Are extracted and stored (stored) at the highest level of free entries in the first special figure reservation storage unit and the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the start winning process is executed.

Further, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to start the special figure game based on the presence or absence of the hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure hold storage unit, and the special figure display result. Based on the numerical data indicating the random value for judgment, it is decided (predetermined) whether or not the variation display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is a "big hit" before the variation display result is derived and displayed. Executes normal symbol processing. That is, when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the special figure game, whether or not to derive and display the jackpot display result as the display result of the variable display based on the random number value stored when the start winning is generated. Execute the process of determining (lottery).

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). It takes in a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering and transmits it to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit for driving the movable body 32.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes audio output, lamp lighting / extinguishing control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.), and movable body 32 control (signal supply for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Back structure of pachinko machine)
Next, the back structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 7. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a left side view showing a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 5 is a plan view showing a frame for a gaming machine to which a gaming board is attached. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing a state in which the pachinko gaming machine is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing a state in which the gaming board is removed from the gaming machine frame. The glass door frame 50 is not shown in FIGS. 5 to 7.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a gaming board 2, a gaming machine frame 3 to which the gaming board 2 is detachably provided, and the game centering on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3. It has a glass door frame 50 provided so that the front surface of the machine frame 3 can be opened and closed, and a square frame-shaped outer frame 60 that supports the game machine frame 3 so as to be openable and closable around the left side. By fixing the outer frame 60 to the gaming island (not shown) installed in, it can be installed on the gaming island.

At the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a replenishment device 150 (FIGS. 3 and 4) is provided from a circulation path of a gaming ball (hereinafter, also referred to as a gaming ball P) provided inside a gaming island (not shown). A ball tank forming portion 201 forming a storage portion capable of storing the game balls supplied via the ball tank forming portion 201 and a first guide passage for guiding the game balls stored in the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the left side are formed. The first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first passage forming body 203 including the first guide passage forming portion 202 are extended in the left-right direction along the upper side portion 3A of the gaming machine frame 3. A terminal substrate 210, which will be described later, is provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202.

The replenishment device 150 sends out a predetermined number (for example, 10 or the like) of a guide member 150A composed of a nozzle or the like capable of guiding the game balls in the circulation path of the game island and the game balls guided by the guide member 150A. The sprocket (not shown), the drive source for driving the sprocket (not shown), and the outer frame 60 are pressed against the gaming machine frame 3 when the opening is closed by the gaming machine frame 3. When the lever switch (not shown) is pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the closed state, the game ball delivered by the sprocket is the ball tank forming portion 201. When the lever switch (not shown) is not pressed by the gaming machine frame 3 in the open state, the gaming ball delivered by the sprocket is held so that it cannot be dropped. When the number of game balls stored in the ball tank forming unit 201 decreases when the outer frame 60 is in the closed state, the sprocket is rotated by the drive source and a predetermined number of game balls are sent out by the ball tank forming unit 201. It is supposed to be supplied to. Further, in the replenishment device 150, a case body 150B is formed by assembling a plurality of members with a plurality of screw members (not shown), and the case body 150B uses a plurality of screw members (not shown) to form a game island. It is fixed in place.

Further, a second guide passage forming portion 204 forming a second guide passage for guiding the game ball guided to the left side by the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a game guided by the second guide passage forming portion 204. A payout device 200 constituting a payout unit capable of paying out balls and a game ball paid out by the payout device 200 are guided to an upper plate, that is, a payout passage for paying out the game ball to a player is formed. Pachinko game to discharge the game ball guided by the payout passage forming unit 205 and the second guide passage forming part 204 to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 without paying out from the payout device 200 to the payout passage forming part 205. A second passage forming body 207 including a ball pulling passage forming portion 206 for forming a ball pulling passage for guiding to a discharge portion (not shown) provided in the lower portion on the back side of the machine 1 and a gaming machine frame 3 It extends vertically along the left side of the back of the building.

The payout device 200 is composed of a case body formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and has a sprocket for paying out game balls by a predetermined number of balls (for example, one ball), a payout motor for rotating the sprocket, and a game. A switching valve that can switch the flow path of the ball between the payout passage and the ball removing passage, an operation lever for switching the switching valve, and the like are provided. Further, in the lower part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3, a board case 91A in which the power supply board 91 is housed, a board case 37A in which the payout control board 37 is housed, and the like are provided.

In the present embodiment, a ball-out switch (not shown) capable of detecting a game ball is provided at a predetermined position in the second guide passage, and the CPU 103 detects a detection signal from the ball-out switch (not shown). Based on the input state, it is constantly monitored whether or not there is a game ball for paying out in the second guide passage on the upstream side of the payout device 200. Then, when the off state of the ball out switch (not shown) continues for a predetermined time or longer, it is determined that the game ball is not supplied to the payout device 200 for some reason such as ball clogging, that is, a replenishment error has occurred, and the ball is paid out. The payout operation by the device 200 is stopped. Further, by displaying a replenishment error on a predetermined display (not shown) connected to the main board 11 and outputting a replenishment error command to the effect control board 12, the glass door frame 50 is connected to the effect control CPU 120. It is possible to execute a notification process indicating that a replenishment error has occurred, such as by causing the game effect lamp 9 provided at a predetermined position on the front surface to emit light in an error mode.

As shown in FIG. 7, the gaming board 2 is detachably arranged from the front side of the gaming machine frame 3 in the opening 221 formed at the substantially central portion of the gaming machine frame 3. The game board 2 includes a plate-shaped body 2a composed of the above-mentioned board surface plate and spacer members, various game parts (for example, obstacle nails, winning devices, etc.) provided on the front side of the plate-shaped body 2a, and a plate-shaped body 2a. Electronic components such as an image display device 5 provided on the back side of the above, an effect device having a movable body 32, a substrate case 12A in which the effect control board 12 is housed, and a board case 11A in which the main board 11 is housed, and a plate shape. It is a structure including a cover body 220 that protects a part, an effect device, an electronic component, and the like.

The substrate cases 11A, 12A, 91A, and 37A are configured so that each substrate can be housed inside by a base member and a cover member made of a transparent synthetic resin material. Among these, the substrate cases 11A and 12A have. The board cases 91A and 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 or the gaming board 2 by one or a plurality of screw members N20 and N21 (see FIG. 3), respectively, and the substrate cases 91A and 37A are attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by locking means (not shown). Alternatively, it is attached to the game board 2. Further, the cover body 220 is formed in a box shape in which the front surface is opened by a transparent synthetic resin material, and a part of the back surface is an opening / closing portion 220A that can rotate around the right side, and is one of the back surfaces of the game board 2. The part can be opened and closed.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 6, the first passage forming body 203 and the second passage forming body 207 provided on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3 and the cover body 220 forming the back surface of the gaming board 2 are used for gaming. In a state where the outer frame 60 is closed by the machine frame 3, the outer frame 60 projects rearward from the outer frame 60. In particular, the first passage forming body 203 is provided so that the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged at the rear position of the upper plate of the outer frame 60 in the upper back surface of the gaming machine frame 3. In a state where the outer frame 60 of the gaming machine 1 is fixed to the gaming island (not shown), the gaming ball can be supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201 from the circulation path above the gaming island via the replenishing device 150. ..

(Mounting structure of the first passage forming body 203)
Next, the structure for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view showing a structure for attaching the passage forming body to the frame for a gaming machine. FIG. 9 is an enlarged rear view showing the upper part of the back surface of the gaming machine frame.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the gaming machine frame 3 is a frame body having a substantially rectangular shape in the front view, and an opening 221 for mounting the gaming board 2 is formed, and is above the opening 221. A metal plate 222 for reinforcement is provided on the back surface of the upper side portion 3A so as to face in the left-right direction. Further, on the back surface of the metal plate 222, an attachment member 223 for attaching the first passage forming body 203 to the gaming machine frame 3 is attached.

The mounting member 223 is formed of a synthetic resin material so that the metal plate 222 can be covered from the back side. It is attached to the metal plate 222 by being screwed into each of the formed plurality of screw holes. A plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 is projected rearward on the right side of the mounting member 223, and is composed of an upper wall portion 225A, a rear wall portion 225B, and left and right side wall portions 225C on the left side of the mounting member 223. A three-dimensional second protruding portion 225 is projected rearward.

The first protruding portion 224 protrudes rearward from a position below the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225, and the ball tank forming portion 201 is arranged on the upper side thereof. Further, a first guide passage forming portion 202 is arranged on the rear side of the rear wall portion 225B of the second protruding portion 225, and a board mounting frame 211 for mounting the terminal board 210 is mounted on the upper side thereof. ing. The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side in the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper part in a state where the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. The screw member N6 is screwed into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 to be mounted on the mounting member 223.

As described above, the mounting member 223 is formed so as to cover the upper part of the game board 2 by having the first protruding portion 224 and the second protruding portion 225 protruding rearward. Therefore, it is prevented that the game ball or the like supplied from the upper part of the game island to the ball tank forming portion 201 enters the game board 2. That is, the mounting member 223 functions as a protective cover for the game board 2.

The first passage forming body 203 has a plurality of screw members N11 to N14 attached to the plurality of mounting holes H11 to H14 from the back side, and a plurality of screw members N15 attached to the mounting holes H15 from the upper side in the mounting member 223. It is attached to the attachment member 223 by being screwed into each screw hole. The screw member N12 to be attached to the mounting hole H12 is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire 226 for removing the electricity charged in the first passage forming body 203 to the first passage forming body 203. Further, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, and a third cover body 330, which will be described later, are attached to the upper portion of the first passage forming body 203. The third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203 by screwing the screw member N16 attached to the mounting hole H16 from above into the screw hole formed in the rear wall of the first passage forming body 203. There is.

As shown in the enlarged view in FIG. 8, the above-mentioned screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are composed of a male screw portion NS and a head NH, of which the screw members N1, N2 and N11 to N16 are heads. A flanged screw in which a flange portion F as a locking portion is integrally formed on the seat surface of the screw, and by increasing the contact area of the seat surface and increasing the frictional force, it is harder to loosen than the screw members N3 to N6. It is a screw member.

For example, the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of each of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 is about 1 to 3 mm, the diameter L2 of the head NH is about 4 to 7 mm, and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F is the head NH. It is said to be about 8 to 10 mm longer than the diameter L2 of.

The sizes and types of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 are arbitrary, and the dimensions of the diameters L1 to L3 are not limited to the above-mentioned dimensions. Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 made of flanged screws are screw members in which a flange portion F (washer) is integrally formed, but instead of the flange portion F, a washer separate from the screw member. May be attached to the screw member, and the flange portion F and the washer constitute the locking portion of the present invention. Further, the screw member shall include a member such as a screw or a bolt that is separated from the attached portion when loosened. Further, the loosening prevention portion also includes a rotation stopper portion of the head NH and an adhesive and the like formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the head NH and the flange portion F (washer).

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first passage forming body 203 needs to receive and store the game ball supplied from above the game island by the ball tank forming portion 201, and also has the first guiding passage. In the above, the upper surface is formed in a concave shape so that the ball clogging is less likely to occur and the upper surface can be easily cleared when the ball clogging occurs.

Further, the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 cover the upper surface of the ball tank forming portion 201 where the game balls that overlap and stay in the vertical direction flow into the first guide passage forming portion 202. The game ball is arranged so as to cover the upper surface of the third cover body 330 at the position where the first guide passage forming portion 202 flows into the second guide passage forming portion 204. Is designed to be rectified. However, a part of the upper surface opening of the first passage forming body 203 is covered by the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330, but the ball tank forming portion 201 and the uncovered area 350 ( The top opening of (see FIG. 27) is open.

On the other hand, a plurality of screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 to be attached to the gaming machine frame 3 and the attachment member 223 are arranged in the vicinity of the periphery of the first passage forming body 203. Further, above the pachinko gaming machine 1 fixed to the gaming island, a screw member (not shown) for assembling a skeleton or the like constituting the gaming island, and various devices arranged inside the gaming island (for example,). A large number of screw members (not shown) for attaching the replenishment device 150 and the like to the skeleton and the like, and a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case bodies of various devices are arranged.

If these screw members loosen and fall off due to vibration or impact generated in the gaming island or pachinko gaming machine 1, they roll due to vibration or impact or opening and closing of the gaming machine frame 3, and the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first There is a possibility that it may fall inward from the uncovered region 350 of the guide passage forming portion 202 and be mixed into the guide passage of the game ball. In particular, the replenishment device 150 and the like are arranged in the vicinity immediately above the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, and by sending a predetermined number of game balls to the ball tank forming portion 201, the game island Since it is a device that easily vibrates when a new game ball is supplied from the circulation path of the game machine or when the game machine frame 3 opens and closes, a screw member for attaching the replenishment device 150 to the skeleton of the game island or the like ( (Not shown) or when a plurality of screw members for assembling a plurality of members constituting the case body 150B of the replenishment device 150 loosen due to vibration and fall off, the inside of the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first induction passage forming portion 202. Very likely to fall into.

Then, when the screw member falls on the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member may move toward the payout device 200 side along with the flow of the game ball and finally be mixed in the payout device 200. When the screw member enters the payout device 200 in this way, the sprocket and the switching valve are damaged by the screw member, the ball is clogged and the payout motor is loaded and malfunctions, or the screw member is a player together with the game ball. There was a risk that the player would feel uncomfortable or distrustful.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described below, the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is mixed with the payout device 200, and the payout device 200 is damaged or malfunctions, or the screw member is formed together with the game ball. Various measures have been taken to prevent the player from being paid out.

(First passage forming body 203)
Next, the first passage forming body 203 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. 10A and 10B are a plan view showing a first passage forming body, and FIG. 10B is a rear view showing a first passage forming body. 11A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 10A, FIG. 11B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. It is a figure. 12A and 12B are a plan view showing a first guide passage forming portion, and FIG. 12B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. 12A. 13A and 13B are a plan view showing a first cover body, FIG. 13B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line EE of (A), and FIG. 13C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF of (A). 14A and 14B are a plan view showing a second cover body, FIG. 14B is a sectional view taken along line GG of FIG. 14A, and FIG. 14C is a sectional view taken along line HH of FIG. 14A. 15A and 15B are a plan view showing a third cover body, FIG. 15B is a sectional view taken along line II of FIG. 15A, FIG. 15C is a sectional view taken along line JJ of FIG. 3 The perspective view which shows the cover body, (E) is the perspective view which shows the ball stop member. 16A and 16B are vertical cross-sectional views showing a first guide passage forming portion showing a state in which the ball-stopping member is in the first state, and FIG. 16B is a first view showing a state in which the ball-stopping member is in the second state. It is a vertical cross-sectional view which shows the guide passage formation part.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 12, the first passage forming body 203 is made of a conductive synthetic resin material, and has an upper surface formed by a bottom wall portion 203A and a standing wall portion 203B erected on the peripheral edge of the bottom wall portion 203A. It has a ball tank forming portion 201 which is formed in a concave shape or a concave groove shape and is arranged on the right side, and a first guide passage forming portion 202 which is arranged on the left side. The ball tank forming portion 201 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed from an upstream portion extending diagonally rearward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and a downstream portion extending in the left-right direction. Become. The dimension of the ball tank forming portion 201 in the front-rear direction is longer than the dimension of the first guidance passage forming portion 202 in the front-rear direction, and more game balls can be stored than the first guidance passage forming portion 202. Has been done. Further, since the bottom wall portion 203A is formed so as to gradually incline downward from the left side of the ball tank forming portion 201 toward the right side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the bottom wall portion 203A is supplied to the ball tank forming portion 201. The game ball naturally flows down with the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 facing the left side.

A mounting piece 261 facing in the vertical direction is projected from the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and mounting holes H11 and H12 facing in the front-rear direction are vertically formed in the mounting piece 261. .. Further, a mounting piece 265 is projected from the rear side of the mounting piece 261, and the mounting piece 265 is formed with a mounting hole H15 facing in the vertical direction. A mounting piece 262 facing in the vertical direction is projected on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the left side of the first guide passage forming portion 202, and a mounting hole H14 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 262. A horizontal wall portion 264 is projected forward on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B on the front side of the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. A mounting piece 263 is erected on the front side of the horizontal wall portion 264, and a mounting hole H13 facing in the front-rear direction is formed in the mounting piece 263.

The first passage forming body 203 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 by screwing a plurality of screw members N11 to N15 attached to the attachment holes H11 to H15 into the screw holes formed in the attachment member 223. Further, a recess 280 having a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view is formed at a position near the rear of the mounting piece 263 on the upper surface of the horizontal wall portion 264.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, holes 270A and 270B are formed at the corners of the bottom wall portion 203A and the rear standing wall portion 203B in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 (the holes 270A and 270B are formed. (See FIG. 11 (A)). A plurality of holes 271A to 271H are formed at substantially the center of the bottom wall 203A on the downstream side (left side) of the holes 271A and 271B toward the downstream side. Further, in the bottom wall portion 203A of the downstream end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a connecting hole 272 for dropping the game ball is formed through the lower second guide passage forming portion 204. ..

In the middle of the first guide passage forming portion 202, a meandering portion 273 that causes the game ball to meander in the front-rear direction and flow down toward the left side is formed, and among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, the holes 271B to 271F are formed. Is formed at a position corresponding to the meandering portion 273. By providing such a meandering portion 273, the ball pressure due to the following ball is prevented from increasing.

Further, the separation dimension L10 of the lower portions of the standing wall portions 203B and 203B before and after the first guide passage forming portion 202 is longer than the diameter 2R (about 11 mm) of the game ball and twice the diameter (about 22 mm). It is shorter than (11 mm <L10 <22 mm). That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed so that the game ball can be guided in a row toward the downstream side.

Since the front-rear dimensions L11 of the holes 271A to 271H excluding the holes 271A and 271B are slightly longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N3 to N6 described above (L11> L2), the screw members N3 to N3 to be described later. Even when N6 is mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw members N3 to N6 can be dropped from the holes 271A to 271H. Further, since the hole 271H formed on the most downstream side has the longest left-right dimension L12 (dimension in the flow direction of the game ball) as compared with the other holes 271A to 271G, the screw members N3 to N6 are connected holes 272. Can be reliably dropped out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 before reaching.

That is, these hole portions 271A to 271H form a specific restriction portion for restricting the movement of the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200. Since dust, dust, or some other member other than the screw member can also fall from the plurality of holes 271A to 271H, it is possible to prevent ball clogging.

(First cover body 310)
As shown in FIGS. 13 (A) to 13 (C), the first cover body 310 extends along the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side of the ball tank forming portion 201, and extends along the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. A mounting portion 311 having a U-shaped cross section that can be fitted from above, a standing wall portion 312 extending from the right side of the mounting portion 311 toward the rear side, and a vertical wall portion 312 extending from the lower side to the right side (ball tank formation). A plate-shaped ball holding portion 313 extending downward so as to be inclined downward toward the portion 201 side), and a cover portion 314 extending from the lower portion of the standing wall portion 312 toward the left side (first guide passage forming portion 202 side). It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D formed so as to be elastically deformable on the front side of the portion 311 and the front and rear sides of the cover portion 314.

In the first cover body 310 configured in this way, the mounting portion 311 is attached to the ball tank forming portion 201 in a state where the standing wall portion 312 is arranged near the boundary between the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. By fitting the upper end of the standing wall portion 203B on the front side from above, the plurality of locking portions 315A to 315D are elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 18) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B. By doing so, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged so as to cover a part of the downstream side of the ball tank forming portion 201 from above, and the cover portion 314 is one on the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The portion is covered from above, and the upper surface of the cover portion 314 is arranged so as to be slightly inclined downward toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 side (see FIG. 9).

In a state where the first cover body 310 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the ball holding portion 313 is arranged on the ball tank forming portion 201 side, so that the game island (not shown) becomes the ball tank forming portion 201. Even when the supplied game balls are stored so as to be stacked in the vertical direction, when the game balls flow down to the first guide passage forming portion 202 side, they are rectified by being pressed downward by the ball holding portion 313. It is supposed to be done.

The cover portion 314 is formed with elongated holes 316A to 316C extending in the left-right direction forming a horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, penetrating vertically in a state of being arranged in a row so as to be parallel to each other. The front and rear dimensions L21 of each of the elongated holes 316A to 316C are all the same, and the front and rear dimensions L21 are shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and the heads of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above. It is shorter than the diameter L2 of NH (L21 <2R, L21 <L2). That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C are formed in such a size that the game ball and the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 cannot be dropped. Reinforcing ribs hang down from the peripheral edges of the elongated holes 316A to 316C on the lower surface of the cover portion 314.

Further, since the elongated holes 316A to 316C are extended along the flow direction of the gaming ball, the gaming ball P falls on the upper portions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C. If so, the game ball P can move in the flow direction (left side).

(Second cover body 320)
As shown in FIGS. 14 (A) to 14 (C), the second cover body 320 includes a plate-shaped cover portion 324 formed along the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and a cover portion. It is mainly composed of a plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B formed elastically deformably on the front and rear sides of the 324, and the right end portion of the cover portion 324 is attached to the left end portion of the cover portion 314 of the first cover body 310. The first passage forming body 203 is formed by elastically locking the plurality of locking portions 325A and 325B to the locked portions 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 302B in a state of being close to each other. Can be attached to. In the attached state, the cover portion 324 covers a part of the upstream side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (FIG. 9). reference).

Recessed grooves 326A to 326C extending in the left-right direction are formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 324 in a state of being arranged in a row with each other. The recessed grooves 326A to 326C have different front-rear dimensions L22A to L22C, but are shorter than the diameter 2R of the game ball (L22A to L22C <2R). The front-rear dimension L22B of the central concave groove 326B having the longest front-rear dimension is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L22B> L2). That is, the concave groove 326B is formed in a size that cannot accommodate the game ball and can accommodate the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L22B of the concave groove 326B is longer than the front-rear dimension L21 of the elongated holes 316A to 316C of the cover portion 314 (L22B> L21).

Further, since the front-rear dimension L22A of the concave groove 326A and the front-rear dimension L22C of the concave groove 326C are longer than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 (L22B> L1, L22C> L1). ), At least the size is such that the male threaded portion NS can be accommodated.

Further, since the concave grooves 326A to 326C are extended along the flow direction of the game ball and are arranged so as to be inclined downward toward the flow direction of the game ball, FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (C) As shown in the above, when the game ball P falls on the upper part of the concave grooves 326A to 326C, the game ball P is guided in the flow direction (left side).

(Third cover body 330)
As shown in FIGS. 15 (A) to 15 (C) and FIG. 16, the third cover body 330 has a plate-shaped cover portion 334 formed along the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. , Mounting that is projected from above between a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D formed elastically deformably on the front and rear sides of the left end of the cover portion 334 and the locking portions 335C and 335D on the back surface, and the screw member N15 is mounted from above. It is mainly composed of a mounting portion 331 formed with a hole H15 and a ball stopper member 340 provided at the left end portion of the upper surface of the cover portion 334, and a plurality of locking portions 335A to 335D at the left end of the cover portion 324 stand on the wall. It is elastically locked to the locked portion 317 (see FIG. 20) formed on the outer surface of the portion 302B, and the screw member N15 attached to the mounting hole H15 is screwed into the screw hole provided on the outer surface of the vertical wall portion 203B. By entering, it is attached to the first passage forming body 203. In the attached state, the cover portion 334 covers the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 from above, and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball (see FIG. 9).

The cover portion 334 extends obliquely upward from the left side to the right side, and a recess 336 having a predetermined depth extends from the right end portion on the upper surface toward the left side. Since a part on the right side approaches the meandering portion 273, it is formed corresponding to the shape of the meandering portion 273. Further, at the position corresponding to the recess 336, a slit 337 having a horizontally long U-shape in a plan view is formed, so that a straightening vane 338 that can be elastically deformed so that the left end side swings in the vertical direction is formed. At the right end, an inclined plate portion 339 that inclines downward toward the right side is formed, so that the game balls P stacked vertically are leveled while being guided to be pressed against the bottom wall portion 203A. (See FIG. 16).

The front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the diameter 2R of the game ball, and is longer than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L23). > 2R, L23> L2). That is, the recess 336 is formed in a size capable of accommodating the game ball P and the head NHs of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16. Further, the front-rear dimension L23 of the recess 336 is longer than the front-rear dimension L22B of the recessed groove 326B of the cover portion 324 (L23> L22B).

Further, since the recess 336 is extended along the flow direction of the game ball and is arranged so as to incline downward toward the flow direction of the game ball, the recess 336 is as shown in FIG. 15 (D). When the game ball P falls on the upper part of the 336, the game ball P is guided in the flow direction (left side).

Further, since the front-rear dimension L24 of the slit 337 is shorter than the diameter L2 of the head NH of the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 described above (L24 <L2), the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 ~ N16 does not fall from the slit 337.

The ball stopper 340 includes a plate-shaped front wall portion 341A having a substantially triangular shape in the rear view, a rear wall portion 341B arranged on the back side of the front wall portion 341A, and a front wall portion 341A and a rear wall portion 341B. It is composed of a rotating portion 341 having a left wall portion 341C to be connected, a protruding wall portion 341D projecting from the upper end of the left wall portion 341C, and a cylindrical shaft portion 342 facing in the front-rear direction. Bearing portions 343A and 343B that rotatably support the front and rear ends of the shaft portion 342 are erected on the left side of the upper surface of the cover portion 334. Further, a slit 344 into which the front wall portion 341A can be inserted is formed on the right side of the bearing portion 343A in the cover portion 334.

As shown in FIG. 16, when the third cover body 330 is attached to the first passage forming body 203, the cover portion 324 covers the upper part of the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the cover portion 324 is arranged so as to incline downward toward the downstream side (left side) so as to approach the bottom wall portion 203A, the game balls P stacked vertically in the first guide passage forming portion 202 are placed. It is leveled while flowing down so that it can finally flow out one by one from the communication hole 272. In particular, since the rectifying plate 338 can be elastically deformed when the game balls come into contact with each other, the rectifying plate 338 is leveled (rectified) so as to push the game balls downward to the extent that ball clogging does not occur.

(Ball stop member 340)
As shown in FIG. 16A, the ball stopper 340 is rotatable between an upright position in which the rotating portion 341 stands up and an inclining position in which the rotating portion 341 tilts to the right, and the rotating portion 341 Is located in the upright position, and the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344 to allow the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to flow down to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the rotation. The portion 341 is located at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot flow down (or flows down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204. It is possible to change to the second state (difficult), that is, the ball stop state.

By setting the ball stop member 340 in the second state in this way, it is possible to restrict the entry of the game ball into the second guide passage forming portion 204. Therefore, in this state, the game in the second guide passage forming portion 204 It is possible to remove the ball and remove the payout device 200 for inspection or replacement.

Further, as shown in FIG. 16A, when the ball stopper 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C are formed. The space portion surrounded by the substantially U-shaped wall portion in a plan view functions as a retention portion in which the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can stay, as will be described later. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16B, when the ball stopper 340 is in the second state, the rotating portion 341 is tilted, but the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage. Therefore, as will be described later, the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 can be retained on the right side of the protruding wall portion 341D.

(Terminal board 210)
Next, the terminal board 210 will be described with reference to FIG. 17 based on FIG. 17A and 17B are perspective views showing a board mounting frame on which a terminal board is mounted, FIG. 17B is a KK cross section of (A), and FIG. 17C is an LL cross section of (B). ..

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 17, the terminal board 210 has a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the rear, and a cable connection portion (not shown) to which a signal line cable (not shown) connected to the main board 11 or the like is attached / detached on the back surface (not shown). ) And a mounting member 232 provided with a plurality of connection holes 231 for connecting a plurality of cables C (see FIG. 3) connected to an external device such as a hall computer. A connection pinch (not shown) for sandwiching the tip of each cable C is provided at a position corresponding to each connection hole 231 inside the mounting member 232. A spring (not shown) for urging the connection pinch in the closing direction, that is, in the direction of sandwiching the tip of the cable C is provided. The mounting member 232 is provided with a plurality of operation units 233 for releasing each connection pinch (not shown) against the urging force of the spring (not shown).

The number of cables C that can be connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 of the terminal board 210 as the first board provided above the first guide passage forming portion 202 is the first number (for example, 20). On the other hand, each signal line is also connected to the second substrate such as the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 provided below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the number of the second is less than the first number. The number (for example, 10) is set.

A plurality of the operation portions 233 are provided corresponding to the connection hole portions 231 and have a substantially hook shape in a side view, and are swung in the front-rear direction with the base end side thereof as a swing shaft. When opening the connection pinch (not shown) described above, the connection pinch (not shown) is released by pressing the operation unit 233 upward or downward to swing the operation unit 233. Then, when the tip of the cable C is inserted into the connection hole 231 with the connection pinch open and the pressing operation of the operation unit 233 is stopped, the connection pinch is closed by the urging force of the spring (not shown). Cable C will be held. The operation units 233 arranged in the left-right direction have different shapes alternately in the left-right direction so that the adjacent operation units 233 do not interfere with the pressing operation when the predetermined operation unit 233 is pressed. There is.

The board mounting frame 211 is mounted from the back side in the mounting hole H6 formed in the upper part in a state where the locking piece 212 projecting downward from the lower side is inserted into the locking hole 213 formed in the rear wall portion 225B. The screw member N6 is screwed into the screw hole formed in the mounting member 223 to be mounted on the mounting member 223. Further, the substrate mounting frame 211 is formed with a horizontally long rectangular opening 234.

On the inner surface of the board mounting frame 211, a plurality of regulating portions 235 that regulate the forward movement of the terminal board 210 by locking to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 inserted from the front side, and the restricting portions 235 forward the terminal board 210. A plurality of locking portions 236 that can be elastically locked to the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 whose movement is restricted from the front side, and a positioning piece 237 that abuts on the peripheral edge of the terminal substrate 210 to determine the arrangement position. Have. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is inserted from the front side of the board mounting frame 211, and the locking portion 236 is elastically locked in a state where the movement to the front is restricted by the plurality of regulating portions 235 to mount the terminal board. It is attached to the frame 211. That is, the terminal board 210 is attached to the board mounting frame 211 by using a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members (by a mounting method different from the mounting method using the screw members). Can be installed.

Since the terminal board 210 is formed with a plurality of connection holes 231 to which the cables C can be connected, the operation unit 233 corresponding to each cable C is formed during the wiring work for connecting the plurality of cables C to the connection holes 231. Need to be operated. Further, when the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island and the clerk of the game hall opens the game machine frame 3 for inspection or the like, the cable C hanging from the upper part of the game island is the outer frame. The connection may be tensioned by being routed forward of the 60. That is, since the terminal board 210 tends to be loaded on the mounting portion, when the terminal board 210 is mounted on the board mounting frame 211 or the mounting member 223 by the screw member, the screw member loosens and easily comes off. Therefore, the terminal board 210 is mounted by a mounting method that does not use the screw member. ing.

Further, in a state where the terminal board 210 is mounted on the board mounting frame 211, the connection hole portion 231 and the operation portion 233 of the terminal board 210 face the rear side from the opening 234 (see FIG. 17A). ). Further, since the plurality of operation units 233 project substantially horizontally toward the rear, the screw members N3 to N6 can be held by the plurality of operation units 233 arranged side by side as described later. Further, a recess 242 capable of accommodating the screw members N3 to N6 is formed between the lower part of the terminal board 210 and the front part of the board mounting frame 211.

(Attachment state of screw members N1 to N16)
Next, the mounting states of the screw members N1 to N16 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 21. FIG. 18 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame is viewed from diagonally behind. 19A is a plan view showing the periphery of the ball tank portion on the back surface of the game frame, and FIG. 19B is a sectional view taken along line MM of FIG. 19A. FIG. 20 is a perspective view showing a state in which the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 21 is a plan view showing the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion on the back surface of the game frame. 22A is a sectional view taken along the line NN of FIG. 21, FIG. 22B is a sectional view showing a rotational state of the screw member, and FIG. 22C is a sectional view taken along the line OO of FIG. 23A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP of FIG. 21, and FIG. 23B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line QQ of FIG. FIG. 24 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line RR of FIG. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SS of FIG. 26A and 26B show a retention state of the screw member when the ball stopper is in the first state, FIG. 26B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line TT of A, and FIG. 26C is a second state of the ball stopper. The staying state of the screw member at the time of (D) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line UU of (C). FIG. 27 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the screw member. FIG. 28 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the first guide passage forming portion showing the moving state of the game ball on the cover portion.

As shown in FIGS. 9, 18 and 19 (A), the ball tank forming portion 201 on the back surface of the gaming machine frame 3 and its periphery are screw members N1 to for mounting the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222. Screw members N11, N12, and N15 for attaching N2 and the first passage forming body 203 to the attachment member 223 are attached.

Specifically, the screw members N1 and N2 are attached from the back side to the front at a position separated from the ball tank forming portion 201 to the right side and below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, even if the screw members N1 and N2 loosen due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and fall out rearward, it is extremely unlikely that they will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG. ..

Because the screw members N11 and N12 are attached from the back side to the front on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position below the upper end edge of the ball tank forming portion 201. Even if the screw members N11 and N12 loosen due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and fall out rearward, it is extremely unlikely that they will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG.

Since the screw member N15 is attached from the upper side to the lower side on the outer surface of the standing wall portion 203B on the right side of the ball tank forming portion 201 and at a position lower than the upper end edge of the ball tank forming portion 201, pachinko game Even if the screw member N15 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the machine 1 and falls off upward, it is extremely unlikely that the screw member N15 will fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 as shown in FIG.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 form a ball tank in which the game balls supplied by the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island are received and stored, and the load of a large number of game balls is applied. Since it is arranged around the portion 201, vibration and impact are likely to occur. Therefore, a threaded member with a flange is used because the contact area with the attached portion is large and loosening is unlikely to occur.

Further, the screw members N1, N2, N11, N12, and N15 around the ball tank forming portion 201 are located at positions where they are unlikely to fall into the ball tank forming portion 201 even if they loosen and fall off, that is, the upper surface opening of the ball tank forming portion 201. Since it is arranged below the game island, it may be mixed into the ball tank forming portion 201 which opens upward to receive and store the game ball supplied by the replenishment device 150 from the circulation path above the game island. It is suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 19B, the ball tank forming portion 201 is close to (or may be in contact with) the upper surface side of the plate-shaped first protruding portion 224 that protrudes rearward in the mounting member 223. The gap L30 between the bottom wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 is shorter than the diameter L1 of the male screw portion NS of the screw member (L30 <L1), so that the bottom It is unlikely that the screw member is sandwiched between the wall portion 203A and the first protruding portion 224 and is held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201.

Further, the gap L31 formed between the rear portion of the bottom wall portion 203A of the ball tank forming portion 201 and the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220 is formed from the head L2 of the flanged screw member and the diameter L3 of the flange portion F. (L3> L2), the flanged screw member is hardly caught in the gap L31 and held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 (B), if the screw member N15 falls out of the mounting hole H15 as the mounted portion and falls on the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220, the upper wall portion 220H becomes Since the screw member N15 that has fallen flows down to either the rear or the left side because it is inclined downward toward the back surface side, it is hardly held in the vicinity of the ball tank forming portion 201. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member N15 from being mixed into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, 91A provided below the ball tank forming portion 201 and contacting the wiring of the substrate to cause disconnection or the like. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 9, 20 and 21 (A), screw members N3 to N5 for mounting the mounting member 223 to the metal plate 222 and a substrate are provided in and around the first guide passage forming portion 202. The screw member N6 for mounting the mounting frame 211 on the mounting member 223, the screw members N13 and N14 for mounting the first passage forming body 203 on the mounting member 223, and the third cover body 330 are attached to the first guiding passage forming portion 202. A screw member N16 for attaching to the screw member N16 is attached.

Specifically, the screw members N3 to N6 are separated from the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front side and are directed from the back side to the front at a position above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B in the first guide passage forming portion 202. The screw member is mounted by arranging the second protruding portion 225 of the mounting member 223 between the mounting positions of the screw members N3 to N6 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. Although the first guide passage forming portion 202 is separated to some extent from the mounting positions of each of N3 to N6, the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is inclined downward toward the back side, so that the pachinko gaming machine When the screw members N3 to N6 loosen and fall out rearward due to the vibration or impact generated in 1, the screw members N3 to N6 move rearward on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 as shown in FIG. There is a high possibility that it will fall into the guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 22, the screw member N3 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H3. Further, at a position on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A corresponding to the mounting hole H3, a concave groove 227 for avoiding interference with the head NH when the screw member N3 is mounted on the mounting hole H3 is linear toward the rear. It is extended to. The concave groove 227 is formed so that the left and right widths are tapered toward the rear side and become shallower. However, since the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A is inclined downward toward the back side, the concave groove is formed. The bottom surface of the 227 is substantially horizontal (or slightly inclined downward toward the back surface side).

Therefore, if the screw member N3 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N3 will fall into the concave groove 227 on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 (FIG. FIG. 22 (A)). Further, the screw member N3 that has fallen into the concave groove 227 is likely to be guided so as to move linearly toward the rear when vibration or impact occurs, but the concave groove 227 is substantially horizontal toward the rear. The screw member N3 is less likely to move rearward than in regions other than the concave groove 227. That is, the concave groove 227 constitutes a special limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member N3 moving toward the first guiding passage forming portion 202 to the first guiding passage forming portion 202.

Here, all the screw members including the screw member N3 are composed of the head NH and the male screw portion NS, and when they fall on the upper surface of the flat upper wall portion 225A, the peripheral edge of the head NH and the male screw portion NS Since the screw member N3 tilted as shown in FIG. 22 (B) is often in a tilted posture when the two points are in contact with the tip (see FIG. 22 (A)), vibration or impact occurs. Occasionally, the head NH may rotate around the tip of the male screw portion NS so as to swing its head, and its direction may change. Therefore, if it falls on a flat surface other than the concave groove 227 on the upper surface of the upper wall portion 225A, or if it deviates from the rear end of the concave groove 227, it may move linearly toward the rear or the head. The NH may move to turn to the left or right by rotating like shaking its head. That is, as shown by an arrow in FIG. 20, when it moves so as to bend to the right toward the rear, it is highly likely that it falls on the first cover body 310, and when it moves linearly toward the rear, it is the first. There is a high possibility that the cover body 320 will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 in front of the first guide passage when the cover body 320 is moved so as to bend to the left.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the screw member N3 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H3 is guided to the rear end of the concave groove 227 and then moves so as to bend rearward to the right, the first cover body. There is a high possibility that it will fall onto the cover portion 314 of 310. As shown in FIG. 22 (A), when the screw member N3 falls on the cover portion 314, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the elongated holes 316A to 316C, or the male screw portion NS becomes Although it is inserted into any of the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the head NH is locked without falling off, so that the head NH does not fall from the cover portion 314 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 and stays on the cover portion 314. Will be done. That is, the elongated holes 316A to 316C cause the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 314 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiting unit for limiting.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, when the groove 227 is guided to the rear end and then linearly moved rearward, the cover portion 324 of the second cover body 320 or the first passage is formed. There is a high possibility that it will fall on the horizontal wall portion 264 of the body 203. As shown in FIG. 22C, when the screw member N3 falls on the cover portion 324, the screw member N3 tilts so that the male screw portion NS intersects the concave grooves 326A to 326C, or the male screw portion NS or the like. Since a part of the head NH is housed in the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the head NH does not fall from the cover portion 324 into the first guide passage forming portion 202 but stays on the cover portion 324. That is, the concave grooves 326A to 326C cause the screw member N3 that has fallen onto the cover portion 324 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a predetermined limiting unit for limiting.

Further, when the product falls on the horizontal wall portion 264 of the first passage forming body 203 provided between the rear wall portion 225B of the second protruding portion 225 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is placed on the horizontal wall portion 264. It stays in a state of being inclined to. That is, the horizontal wall portion 264 side is arranged between the rear wall portion 225B and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, so that the upper wall portion Since the recess 290 that opens upward is formed by the 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B, and the horizontal wall portion 264, the recess 290 is accommodated and stays in the recess 290. That is, the recess 290 is a screw member provided between the mounting hole H3 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of N3 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N13 is separated forward from the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the first passage forming body 203, and is slightly above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H13 formed in the mounting piece 263, which is the position. Therefore, if the screw member N13 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, it may fall into the recess 280 formed in the vicinity of the rear side of the mounting hole H13 in the horizontal wall portion 264. High (see FIG. 23 (A)). Specifically, the horizontal wall portion 264 is arranged between the mounting piece 263 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 below the upper end edges of the upper wall portion 225A and the vertical wall portion 203B, whereby the upper wall portion Since a recess 280 smaller than the recess 290 is formed in the vicinity of the mounting hole H13 in the recess 290 opened upward by the 225A, the vertical wall portion 203B and the horizontal wall portion 264, it is accommodated and stays in the recess 280. Become.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20 and 23 (B), when the screw member N13 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, it is arranged on the lower left side of the horizontal wall portion 264. It may fall and stay in the recess 214 provided near the right side of the board mounting frame 211. That is, the recess 214 is provided between the mounting hole H13 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and is a screw member that has moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of N13 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N4 is formed in the mounting member 223 at a position forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H4. Therefore, if the screw member N4 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N4 will fall onto the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 (see FIG. 24).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 24, the screw member N4 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H4 moves rearward so as to bend to the right, or linearly moves rearward. In any case of moving so as to bend to the right, as shown in FIG. 24, the board mounting frame 211 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 from above the upper wall portion 225A. The screw member N4 that has fallen from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H enters the inside through the opening 234 and is accommodated and stays in the recess 242 formed by the substrate mounting frame 211 and the terminal substrate 210, or the substrate mounting frame. Although the male screw portion NS is inserted into the recess 243 formed between the 211 and the vertical wall portion 203B, the head NH may stay because it is locked without falling off. That is, the recess 242 and the recess 243 are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the screw member N4 to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

As shown in FIG. 24, when the screw member N4 falls from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H, the screw member N4 may be held on the plurality of operation units 233. Further, in the state where the pachinko game machine 1 is fixed to the game island, since a plurality of cables C connected to the plurality of connection holes 231 hang down from the upper part of the game island (see FIG. 3), these cables C may prevent the screw member N4 from falling from the rear end of the upper wall portion 211H. That is, the operation unit 233 and the cable C are provided between the mounting hole H4 around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the first guide passage forming portion 202, and move toward the first guide passage forming portion 202. It constitutes a special limiting portion for limiting the falling of the screw member N4 that has been made to the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, when the screw member N4 falls out of the mounting hole H4 and moves so as to bend rearward and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, the first cover body is opened at the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. The first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered region 350 provided between the second cover body 320 and the third cover body 330, which is not covered by any of the 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330. Fall into. The screw member N4 that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P, falls out from between the game balls, and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A. It falls from any of the holes 271B to 271D formed at the position corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the guide passage forming portion 202 and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, even if it does not fall from any of the holes 271B to 271D, it finally falls from any of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. That is, the holes 271A to 271H form a specific restriction portion for restricting the movement of the screw member N4 that has fallen into the ball tank forming portion 201 or the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200.

On the other hand, when the screw member N4 slips out of the mounting hole H4 and moves so as to bend to the left toward the rear and then crosses the vertical wall portion 203B, it is placed on the recess 336 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. By falling, the cover portion 334 does not fall into the first guide passage forming portion 202, but is housed in the recess 336 and stays there. That is, the recess 336 is for limiting the drop of the screw member N4 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Consists of a predetermined restriction part of.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N6 is formed in the substrate mounting frame 211 at a position forward from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. It is mounted in the mounting hole H6. Therefore, if the screw member N6 loosens due to vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and falls off rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N6 will fall onto the upper wall portion 211H of the board mounting frame 211 (see FIG. 25).

As shown in FIGS. 20, 21 and 25, the screw member N6 that has fallen out of the mounting hole H6 is guided to move linearly rearward by a plurality of ribs 211A extending rearward. After that, when it moves so as to bend to the right side, as shown in FIG. 25, it falls to a position near the upstream side of the ball stopper 340 on the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330. As described with reference to FIG. 16, the cover portion 334 covers the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to incline downward toward the downstream side (payout device 200 side), so that the cover portion 334 is on the cover portion 334. The screw member N6 that has fallen to a position near the upstream side of the ball fixing member 340 in the above is likely to move toward the downstream side.

As shown in FIG. 26, the screw member N6 that has moved to the downstream side comes into contact with the ball stopper 340 provided at the downstream side end portion (left end portion) that is the lower side of the cover portion 334, and is brought into contact with the downstream side (the left end portion). By restricting the movement to the left side), it stays on the cover portion 334.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 26A and 26B, when the ball stopper 340 is in the first state, the right side of the rotating portion 341 is opened, and the front wall portion 341A and the rear wall portion 341B are opened. Since the screw member N6 can be retained in the space surrounded by the wall portion having a substantially U-shape in a plan view composed of the left wall portion 341C, the screw member N6 is held without dropping from the cover portion 334. be able to. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 26 (C) and 26 (D), when the ball stopper 340 is in the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is positioned in an upright state so as to cross the passage, so that the screw member N6 is inserted into the protruding wall. Since it can be retained on the right side of the portion 341D, the screw member N6 can be held without dropping from the cover portion 334.

In the second state, the protruding wall portion 341D is only arranged so as to intersect with respect to the inclination direction, and the front and rear sides are open, so that the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted may fall backward or forward. On the other hand, in the first state, the front and rear left sides of the screw member N6 whose movement is restricted are covered with the front wall portion 341A, the rear wall portion 341B, and the left wall portion 341C. It can be more reliably retained than in the second state where the left wall portion 341C is located only on the left side. That is, the ball stopper 340 is provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the tilt direction of the cover portion 334, and constitutes a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. doing.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 21, the screw member N5 is separated from the downstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the front right side in the mounting member 223, and is located above the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Although it is attached to the formed mounting hole H5, the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not arranged directly behind the mounting hole H5, and the upper wall portion 225A of the second protruding portion 225 is also cut in the middle. Since it has been scratched, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out backward, it falls on the upper wall portion 225A of the second protrusion 225, but before reaching the first guide passage forming portion 202. There is a high possibility that the upper wall portion 225A will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw member N16 is attached to the mounting hole H16 formed in the third cover body 330 on the rear side of the first guide passage forming portion 202 and below the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B. Therefore, if the screw member N5 loosens due to vibration or impact and falls out rearward, there is a high possibility that the screw member N5 will fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. ..

(Action / effect)
As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a screw member provided at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3. N3 to N6, etc. come off due to loosening caused by vibration or impact generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and move backward on the upper wall portion 225A due to vibration or impact or opening / closing of the gaming machine frame 3, and then cover. When it falls on the portions 314, 324 and 334, the elongated holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, the recesses 336 and the ball stopper 340 restrict the drop to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since there is a high possibility that the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 will stay on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 without falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screws that have fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the members from moving and being mixed into the payout device 200. Further, since a vertical wall portion is formed at the left (downstream side) end of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C, even if the screw member moves to the left side, it enters the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be suitably prevented from falling.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, on the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the regions other than the uncovered region 350 are covered by the cover portions 314, 324 and 334, but the ball tank forming portion 201 Even if the replenished game ball spills and gets on the cover parts 314 and 324 on the upstream side, the front-rear dimensions of the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C are from the diameter 2R of the game ball P. The game ball P rolls to the left side, then falls from the left end of the cover portion 324 to the uncovered region 350, and is returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Therefore, not only can the game ball that has been placed on the cover portions 314 and 324 be returned to the inside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also the game ball P stays in the elongated holes 316A to 316C and the concave grooves 326A to 326C. As a result, the space in which the dropped screw member N stays is limited, or the falling screw member N comes into contact with the staying game ball and falls from the uncovered area 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be prevented.

When the game ball falls on the cover portion 334, it flows down on the cover portion 334 toward the left side and the flow is regulated by the ball stop member 340, or it falls out of the first guide passage forming portion 202. do.

Further, in the elongated holes 316A to 316C as the first retaining portion and the concave grooves 326A to 326C as the second retaining portion, the concave groove 326B is provided at a position closer to the dispensing device 200 than the elongated holes 316A to 316C. The front-rear dimension L22B is larger than the front-rear dimension L22 of the elongated hole 316B (L22B> L21). By doing so, the screw member tends to stay in the retention portion as it approaches the payout device 200, so that the screw member that has fallen on the cover portions 314 and 324 moves and falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202. It can be prevented from doing so.

On the other hand, the screw members N3 to N6 that have fallen and stayed on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 move due to vibration or impact, and are not covered provided between the cover portion 324 and the cover portion 334. When it falls from the area 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, or after moving backward on the upper wall portion 225A like the screw member N4, the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the uncovered area 350. Even if it falls directly inward, it falls out from between the game balls and approaches the bottom wall portion 203A while moving toward the downstream side according to the flow of the game ball P in the first guide passage forming portion 202. As a result, the screw member falls from any of the holes 271A to 271H and is discharged to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 moves to the payout device 200. It is possible to suppress mixing.

Further, the plurality of holes 271A to 271H formed in the bottom wall portion 203A are formed from the middle flow portion (near the meandering portion 273) to the downstream portion in the first guide passage forming portion 202, and are formed in the ball tank forming portion 201. There is a region in which no hole is formed between the holes 270A and 270B formed at close positions and the hole 271A on the most upstream side of the holes 271A to 271H. As described above, since a region in which a plurality of holes are not formed is formed in the upstream portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202, the game balls from the ball tank forming portion 201 flow down in a vertically stacked state. By doing so, it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the strength of the bottom wall portion 203A near the upstream portion in the first guide passage forming portion 202 to which the ball pressure is applied.

Further, by forming the region in which the hole portion is not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in this way, the screw member dropped from the first guide passage forming portion 202 is formed in the rear wall portion of the cover body 220. It is possible to appropriately suppress the entry into the inside of the cover body 220 from the heat radiation hole 220B (see FIG. 6) or the like.

Further, by providing the first cover body 310 and the second cover body 320 at positions corresponding to the regions where the holes are not formed in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202. Can be suppressed from falling, and the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200 without falling to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202. be able to.

Further, since the largest hole 271H among the plurality of holes 271A to 271H is provided at the position closest to the dispensing device 200, the screw member can be preferably removed from the hole 271H outside the first guide passage forming portion 202. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27, when a screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350, the game ball is formed in the ball tank forming portion 201 or the uncovered region 350. The screw members are often located at the upper part of the game ball because the screws are stacked one above the other, but the hole 271H is arranged on the downstream side of the straightening vane 338 of the cover portion 334, that is, Since the game ball is arranged at a position where it is rectified in one upper and lower stages, the screw member easily falls into the hole 271H. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, since at least some of the holes 271B to 271D among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided at positions corresponding to the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the screw member is not covered. Even if it is mixed from the region 350 into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be dropped from the holes 271B to 271D to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, at least some of the holes 271B to 271H among the plurality of holes 271B to 271H are provided on the payout device 200 side of the uncovered region 350 in the first guide passage forming portion 202, as described above. Even when the game ball that has fallen from the uncovered area 350 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 does not reach the holes 271B to 271D, it approaches downward while moving along with the flow of the game ball and falls from the holes 271E to 271H. Since the probability of this is high, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 22 (C), 23 (A), (B), and 24, the screw members N3 to N6 that have moved toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 are referred to the first guide passage forming portion. The recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 as special retention portions that can be retained before reaching 202 are below the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the mounting holes H3 to H6 as the attachment portions. The screw members N3 to N6, which are provided in the above and are separated from the mounting holes H3 to H6 but do not stay in the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242 and 243, can be moved toward the cover portions 314, 324 and 334. It is possible to prevent the screw members N3 to N6 detached from the mounting holes H3 to H6 from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, since the depths of the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are the depths at which a part of the screw members N3 to N6 protrudes when the screw members N3 to N6 are accommodated, the recesses 280, 290, The screw members N3 to N6 staying in 214, 242, and 243 can be easily taken out.

Further, the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243, the above-mentioned elongated holes 316A to 316C, the recessed grooves 326A to 326C, and the recess 336 restrict the falling screw member from falling into the first guide passage forming portion 202. Not only (or obstructing), but also because it is a retention portion that can be retained outside the first guide passage forming portion 202, a clerk of a game hall or the like finds a screw member when performing an inspection or the like. Since it becomes possible to identify which screw member has come off, it becomes easy to take measures against mixing of the screw member into the dispensing device 200.

Further, in the ball stopping member 340 as the specific portion, the rotating portion 341 is located in the upright position, the front wall portion 341A deviates upward from the slit 344, and the game ball of the first guide passage forming portion 202 is guided to the second guide. In the first state where the passage forming portion 204 can flow down, the rotating portion 341 is located at the tilted position, the front wall portion 341A is inserted into the slit 344 and can come into contact with the game ball, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 It is possible to change to a second state in which the game ball cannot flow down (or is difficult to flow down) to the second guide passage forming portion 204, and the first state is when the ball stop member 340 is in the second state. Since the screw member is more likely to stay than in the above case, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 from being mixed into the payout device 200.

More specifically, as described above, the ball stop member 340 is set to the second state when the game balls in the first guide passage and the second guide passage are taken out, that is, the clerk of the game hall or the like is a pachinko gaming machine. While the inspection and maintenance work of 1 is performed, the ball stopper 340 is set to the first state when the pachinko game machine 1 is in an operating state, that is, when the clerk of the game hall cannot monitor it. Therefore, it is possible to preferably prevent the screw member from being mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 in such a state.

Further, the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached to the gaming machine frame 3 at a plurality of places by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as a locking portion, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 are attached. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the machine to the gaming machine frame 3 fall out of the first guiding passage forming portion 202 even if they are separated from the gaming machine frame 3, so that the first guiding passage forming portion 202 and the ball It is attached at a position below the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the tank forming portion 201. Therefore, since the screw members N11 to N14 for mounting the ball tank forming portion 201 are easily loosened due to vibration and the weight of the game ball, they are hard to come off from the game machine frame 3 as a flanged screw member, while the ball tank forming portion 201 and the ball tank forming portion 201 and Even if the screw members N11 to N14 that attach the first guide passage forming portion 202 are removed, they fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202, so that the screw member that has fallen into the first guide passage forming portion 202 is a payout device 200. It can be prevented from being mixed in.

Further, among a plurality of screw members for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first induction passage forming portion 202 to the gaming machine frame 3, a predetermined screw member (for example, the screw member N12) near the peripheral edge portion of the pachinko gaming machine 1 ) Is also used as a screw member for attaching the ground wire (for example, the ground wire 226), so that the screw member (number of parts) can be reduced. It is possible to prevent the screw member from being mixed into the payout device 200. Instead of the ground wire, it may also be used as a screw member for mounting a predetermined member other than the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202.

Further, the screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the ball tank forming portion 201 to the gaming machine frame 3 are attached to the metal plate 222 for reinforcing the gaming machine frame 3, so that the ball tank forming portion 201 is attached. Since 201 can be firmly attached and vibration is less likely to occur, loosening of the screw member can be suitably suppressed.

Further, the screw members N3 to N6 attached to the upper position of the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the gaming machine frame 3 are screw members having no flange portion F and having a small diameter of the head NH. Even if the screw member falls into the first guide passage forming portion 202, it can be easily dropped from the holes 271A to 271H, so that it is possible to prevent the screw member from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 19B and 27, a screw member that has fallen is placed rearward in a region below the first guide passage forming portion 202 in the game board 2 that can be attached to and detached from the gaming machine frame 3. Alternatively, the cover body 220 is provided with an inclined surface (for example, the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220) that can flow down to the payout device 200 side with a gap from the first guide passage forming portion 202. It is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the upper wall portion 220H from bouncing and being mixed into the first guide passage forming portion 202 again.

Further, although not particularly shown, the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, and 91A are provided so as not to protrude rearward from the rear wall portion of the cover body 220, and fall onto the upper wall portion 220H of the cover body 220. By guiding the screw member to flow backward or toward the payout device 200 side, the screw member that has fallen on the upper wall portion 220H is prevented from falling into the substrate cases 11A, 12A, 37A, 91A arranged below. Can be prevented.

Further, the cover body 220 is generated from these drive sources by being provided so as to cover the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2, the effect device having a movable body, and the effect control board 12. Although a plurality of heat radiating holes 220B for releasing heat are formed on the upper part of the rear wall portion (see FIG. 6), these heat radiating holes 220B have at least the head even if the male screw portion NS of the screw member can be inserted. It is preferable that the size is such that NH cannot be inserted. Further, since there is a high possibility that the screw member falls from the upper holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H in the upper wall portion 220H arranged directly below the first guide passage forming portion 202, the heat radiating hole 220B is provided. It is preferable that the upper wall portion 220H is formed at a position that does not correspond to the holes 270A, 270B, 271A to 271H, or is formed at a portion other than the upper wall portion 220H (for example, a rear wall portion). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the dropped screw member from falling into the cover body 220 and adversely affecting the image display device 5, the effect device having a movable body, the effect control board 12, and the like.

(Modification example 1)
Next, a modification 1 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 29. 29A and 29B are a schematic rear view showing a cover portion as a modified example, and FIG. 29 is a schematic rear view showing a state in which cables are wired so as to intersect the cover portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the guide passage forming portion for forming the guide passage for guiding the game ball of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 is extended so as to be inclined downward toward the left side. The first guide passage forming portion 202 has a guide passage forming portion 202 and a second guide passage forming portion 204 extending downward from the lower left end portion of the first guide passage forming portion 202. As shown in FIG. 16, the cover portion 334 of the third cover body 330 provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface thereof is provided so that the ball stopper 340 projects upward on the upper surface of the left end portion. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the present invention, although the embodiment in which the screw member N moving on the cover portion 334 to the left side is received and can be retained has been illustrated. Like 360, the left end portion 360R of the cover portion 360 may be formed in an R shape that curves toward the lower second guide passage forming portion 204.

By doing so, when the game ball P and the screw member N that have fallen on the cover portion 360 move toward the left end portion side, they do not stay on the cover portion 360 and the first guide passage forming portion 202. Since the screw member N falls directly from the left end portion of the screw member N to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202, it is possible to prevent the screw member N from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, as shown in FIG. 29 (B), in the case where the recess 361 capable of retaining the screw member N is formed on the upper surface of the cover portion 360, the third recess 361 in the cover portion 360 is located near the recess 361. 1 The cable CH may be provided so as to intersect the flow direction of the game ball in the guide passage forming portion 202.

By doing so, the screw member N and the game ball P that have accumulated in the recess 361 but may move due to the inclination can be retained by restricting the movement by the cable C.

(Explanation of deformation and application)
For example, in the above-described embodiment, as the screw members, the screw members N1-6, N11-16 for attaching the attachment member 223, the first passage forming body 203, and the like to the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the pachinko machine. Screw members (not shown) that are attached to other parts of the gaming machine 1, screw members (not shown) for assembling the skeletons that make up the gaming island, and various devices (for example, not shown) that are placed inside the gaming island. , Replenishment device 150, etc.), etc.) have been exemplified for screw members (not shown) for attaching to the skeleton, etc. All screw members such as screw members that have remained in the pachinko game machine 1 for some reason, such as forgetting to install them during on-site maintenance, can be targeted, but at least they are pre-installed in the pachinko game machine 1. It is preferable that the screw member can be prevented from being mixed into the payout device 200.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a box-shaped ball tank forming portion 201 having an upper surface opened by the bottom wall portion 203A and the standing wall portion B is applied as a storage portion capable of storing the game medium. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the storage unit can store the game ball, the front-rear dimension is larger than the front-rear dimension of the first guide passage forming portion 202 like the ball tank forming portion 201. It does not have to be long, and may have substantially the same or shorter front-rear dimensions as the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the upper surface does not necessarily have to be open as long as it can receive the game ball supplied from the replenishment device 150.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a payout device 200 capable of paying out a game ball by a rotatable sprocket is applied as a payout unit capable of paying out the game medium has been illustrated, but the present invention is limited thereto. It may be a payout device capable of paying out a game ball by a member other than a sprocket.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper surface is opened, and the upper surface is opened by the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B as a guide passage forming portion for forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the discharge portion. An example is an example in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 formed in a groove shape is applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the guide is composed of a tubular member having an opening formed in a part of the upper surface. It may be a passage forming portion, and its shape, size, and the like can be changed in various ways. The width dimension (front-rear dimension) may be substantially the same as or larger than that of the ball tank forming portion 201, and the game balls may be guided in a plurality of rows so as to be able to flow down.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion capable of storing the game ball and the first guide passage having the upper surface open and guiding the game ball of the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200 are provided. Although the embodiment in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 to be formed is integrally molded is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 are separately formed. The members may be integrally formed by assembling the members with screw members or the like. In this case, the screw member for assembling the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is also the target of the screw member of the present invention.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which a screw member can be mixed from the upper surface opening of the first guide passage forming portion 202 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not limited to this. A screw member may be mixed from a hole, a notch, or the like formed on the standing wall side of the above. Further, when the screw member can be mixed in the second guide passage forming portion 204, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member to the second guide passage forming portion 204 or the second guide passage forming portion 204 A specific restriction portion or the like for restricting the movement of the dropped screw member to the dispensing device 200 may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first cover body 310, the second cover body 320, and the third cover body 330 are applied as the cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire region of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be covered with the cover portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover portion covering a part of the upper surface of the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed of a member separate from the first guide passage forming portion 202. It may be formed integrally with the first guide passage forming portion 202 in advance. That is, the first guide passage forming portion 202 may be formed in advance in a square tubular shape.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member stays on the cover portion as a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion 314, 324, 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Examples of a form in which elongated holes 316A to 316C as holes that can be formed and recessed grooves 326A to 326C and recesses 336 as recesses are applied have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member is not limited to this. A fall control part (fall inhibition part) that can regulate (or hinder) the fall from the cover part, and a movement regulation part (movement obstruction part) that can regulate (or hinder) the movement of the screw member on the cover part. Alternatively, it may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member from the cover portion to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be able to fall. As a means capable of restricting or hindering the drop or movement, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adhering the screw member, and the like may be used.

That is, the predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portions 314, 324 and 334 to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is the fall of the screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202. It suffices as long as it can make it difficult to fall as well as the one that makes it impossible.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of specific restriction units are provided in the first guide passage forming unit 202 and are used as specific restriction units for restricting the movement of the screw member dropped on the first guide passage forming unit 202 to the dispensing device 200. Although the embodiment in which the holes 271A to 271H are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200 side is restricted ( Alternatively, it may be a movement control unit (movement inhibition unit) capable of (inhibition). As a means capable of restricting or hindering the movement to the payout device 200 side, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member, an adhesive portion capable of adsorbing the screw member, and the like. These may be provided at positions that do not affect the flow of the game ball (for example, a corner portion between the bottom wall portion 203A and the vertical wall portion 203B, which is not in contact with the game ball).

That is, the specific restriction unit provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202 and for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the payout device 200 is the screw member payout device 200. If the movement to the side can be restricted, not only the screw member mixed in the first guide passage forming portion 202 cannot be moved to the payout device 200 side, but also the movement can be made difficult. Anything is fine.

Further, when the movement of the screw member that has fallen to the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the dispensing device 200 is restricted (regulated, hindered) by the specific limiting portion provided in the first guide passage forming portion 202, the movement is restricted. There is a high possibility that the ball is clogged because the flow of the game ball is also restricted by the screw member that is restricted and stays in the first guide passage. When the ball is clogged, the replenishment error notification is executed as described above, so that the clerk of the game hall opens the frame 3 for the game machine to form the ball tank forming portion 201 and the first guide passage on the back surface. There is a high possibility that the state of the game ball in the unit 202 will be visually inspected. At this time, since the screw member does not move to the payout device 200 but stays in the first guide passage forming portion 202, it becomes easy for the store clerk or the like to identify that the cause of the ball clogging was the screw member. Appropriate measures can be taken.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the plurality of holes 271A to 271H all have a size capable of dropping the screw member is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the plurality of holes 271A are not limited thereto. As long as at least two or more holes of ~ 271H are formed so that the screw member can be dropped, the other holes need not be able to drop the screw member. Further, the shapes and sizes of the plurality of holes 271A to 271H are arbitrary, and are not limited to the above-mentioned forms and can be changed in various ways.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 are applied as the first substrate to be mounted below the first guide passage forming portion 202, but the present invention is limited thereto. Other substrates such as a relay substrate may also be targeted.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the terminal substrate 210 is applied as the second substrate mounted at a position above the first guide passage forming portion 202 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. , Other substrates such as a relay substrate may be targeted as the second substrate.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12 as the first board exemplify a form in which the board cases 11A and 12A in which these boards are housed are attached to the game board 2 by the screw members N20 and N21. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the various substrates as the first substrate may be directly attached to the gaming board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3 without passing through the substrate case.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the main substrate 11 and the effect control substrate 12 as the first substrate, the substrate cases 11A and 12A in which the respective substrates are housed are the screw members N20 and N21, that is, the screw members are used. The terminal board 210, which is mounted on the game board 2 by the mounting method and serves as the second board, uses a locking means including a plurality of regulating portions 235 and locking portions 236 as mounting means different from the screw members, that is, Although the embodiment of mounting on the board mounting frame 211 by a mounting method different from the mounting method using a screw member has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and a locking means using a latch member or the like, a caulking pin or the like is used. It may include an attachment means, an adhesive means such as an adhesive, and the like.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the screw member provided around the first guide passage forming portion 202 and moving toward the first guide passage forming portion 202 is restricted from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. A form in which the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, and 243 are applied has been illustrated as a special limiting portion for forming the screw member, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the screw member has a first guide passage forming portion 202. A drop control section (fall blocker) that can regulate (or hinder) the fall of the screw member, and a movement control section (movement blocker) that can regulate (or block) the movement of the screw member to the first guide passage forming section 202. , It may be a drop guide portion such as an inclined surface that guides the screw member to the outside of the first guide passage forming portion 202 so as to be able to fall. As a means capable of restricting or hindering the fall or movement of the first guide passage forming portion 202, not only the convex portion and the concave portion, but also a magnet capable of attracting a metal screw member and a screw member can be adhered. It may be an adhesive part or the like.

That is, the special restriction portion for restricting the fall of the detached screw member to the first guide passage forming portion 202 is not only the one that prevents the screw member from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202, but also the one that prevents the screw member from falling to the first guide passage forming portion 202. Anything that can make it difficult to fall will do. For example, a convex portion as a fall restricting portion (fall obstruction portion), a concave portion or a hole portion as a movement restricting portion (movement obstructing portion), or the like may be provided at a predetermined position such as the upper wall portion 225A.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the periphery of the first guide passage forming portion 202 provided with the recesses 280, 290, 214, 242, 243 and the like as the special limiting portion is located near the standing wall portion 203B on the front side. Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least between the mounted portion (mounting hole) to which the screw member is mounted and the guide passage forming portion, the present invention is not necessarily provided at a position near the standing wall portion 203B. For example, it may be provided between the attached portion of the screw member and the guide passage forming portion at a position closer to the attached portion than the guide passage forming portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first is a specific portion capable of retaining the screw member N6 that has fallen on the cover portion 334 on the payout device 200 side in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334 in the cover portion 334. An embodiment in which a ball-stopping member 340 that can be changed is applied to a first state in which the game ball of the guide passage forming portion 202 can flow down and a second state in which the game ball is difficult to flow down or cannot flow down has been illustrated. Not limited to this, if the member is provided on the payout device 200 side (inclination lower side) in the tilt direction of the cover portion 334, the movement of the screw member is restricted even if it does not have the ball fixing function. It may be a convex portion, a standing wall portion, a wiring retainer, or the like that can be (or obstructed).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball-stopping member 340 as a specific portion is provided on the side of the payout device 200 in the inclined direction of the cover portion 334, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, the specific portion may be provided at the end of the cover portion 314,324 on the payout device 200 side as long as it is provided at the end of the cover portion on the payout device 200 side.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which the ball-stopping member 340 as the specific portion is composed of a member separate from the cover portion 334 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. A specific portion (ball stopper) may be integrally formed on a part of the members constituting the cover portion 334.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the locking portion, the flange portion F (washer) having a diameter larger than that of the head NH of the screw members N1, N2, N11 to N16 and integrally formed with the head NH. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of the flange portion F, a washer or the like that is formed separately from the screw member and can be attached to the screw member may be used, or a head. It also includes a rotating stopper and an adhesive for the head NH formed in an uneven shape on the back surface of the NH and the flange portion F (washer). Further, the screw member is not limited to a member that can be attached by a tool such as a screwdriver, but may be a thumbscrew, and includes a member such as a screw or a bolt that is detached from the attached portion when loosened.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the ball tank forming portion 201 as a storage portion is attached to the game machine frame 3 at a plurality of places by screw members N11 to N14 having a flange portion F as a locking portion to form a ball tank. The screw members N11 to N14 for attaching the portion 201 and the first guide passage forming portion 202 to the game machine frame 3 fall out of the first guide passage forming portion 202 even if they are separated from the game machine frame 3. , A mode in which the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201 are attached at a position lower than the upper end edge of the standing wall portion 203B has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first Even if the position is above the upper end edge of the vertical wall portion 203B of the guide passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201, for example, the position is laterally displaced from the position directly above the first guiding passage forming portion 202 or the ball tank forming portion 201. If it is attached to a non-directly above position, it is possible to prevent the screw member from falling directly onto the first guide passage forming portion 202. Further, the dropped screw member is guided to fall outside the first guide passage forming portion 202 by a predetermined guiding portion (for example, a concave groove formed in the upper wall portion 225A) or the like. May be good.

Further, the predetermined limiting portion, the specific limiting portion, the special limiting portion, and the specific portion in the above embodiment are not only the screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16 attached to the pachinko gaming machine 1, but also pachinko games such as a game island. Although the embodiment of restricting or restricting (inhibiting) the movement of the screw member other than the machine 1 to the payout device 200 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is attached to at least the pachinko gaming machine 1. Restrict or restrict the movement of the screw members N1 to N6, N11 to N16, and the screw members N3 to N6 attached above the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the ball tank forming portion 201 to the payout device 200. (Inhibition) It is preferable that it is formed in a possible size and morphology.

(Feature unit 053SG)
Next, a mode for carrying out the gaming machine in the feature unit 053SG according to the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 30-1 to 30-24.

The game machine in the feature unit 053SG is a pachinko game machine installed in a game hall or the like, a slot machine, or the like, and in particular, as shown in FIG. 30-1, a game control microcomputer for controlling the game is mounted. It is equipped with a game control board. As the game machine described below, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment can be applied, the main board 11 of the above embodiment can be applied to the game control board, and the effect control board 12 can be applied to the effect control board. Is.

As shown in FIG. 30-1, a plurality of input components such as various switches and sensors for detecting the input status according to the progress of the game are connected to the game control board. Input parts include, for example, a detection switch that detects an operation by a player, a detection switch that detects the passage of a game medium such as a game ball or a medal, a sensor that identifies a movable object used in a game such as a reel, and a player. It is a detection switch used for various settings such as the advantage of the reel, and a detection switch for detecting the opening of a door or an abnormality.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is equipped with an input circuit for detecting input signals from these input components, and the detection status of the input signal from the input components by the input circuit is specified. The input data is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and is used to control the game by the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, a plurality of output components such as a display, an LED, a motor, and a solenoid that control output according to the progress of the game are connected to the game control board. The output parts are, for example, a display that displays according to the lottery result, a display that displays the progress of the game and the state of the game machine, a display that instructs the player in the operation mode, and a value owned by the player. A display that displays the game status, an LED that indicates the game status, an LED that notifies the occurrence of an abnormality, a motor that operates a movable part used for a game such as a reel or a variable winning device, a solenoid, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-1, the game control board is provided with an output circuit that outputs an output signal to the corresponding output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The game control microcomputer controls the output components according to the progress of the game by transmitting the output data to the output circuit.

Further, the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit are connected via a data bus, and the input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The output data of is transmitted via a shared data bus.

Also, not all input circuits are connected via a shared data bus, but some input circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus, and the shared data bus is used. The input data is transmitted from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer without going through.

The output circuits are all connected via a shared data bus, but some output circuits are directly connected to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus and are shared. The output data may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit without going through the data bus.

In addition, the data bus is connected to the external output terminal, and the output data from the game control microcomputer is output to the external device as an external output signal. It is possible to inspect the performance of the game machine using the output data output as.

Next, the game control board included in the game machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the following Examples 1 to 3.

The structure of the game control board in the first embodiment will be described. The game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals provided by the electronic components are soldered. In the following, electronic components are mounted. The surface is called a mounting surface, and the surface on which electronic components are not mounted and the terminals of the electronic components are soldered is called a soldered surface.

FIG. 30-2 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-3 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 30-2 and 30-3, the game control board is a rectangular printed circuit board composed of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has insulating properties. Consists of. Further, the game control board is formed with a plurality of through holes penetrating the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are composed of conductors so as to appropriately connect the through holes. A plurality of the above-mentioned wiring patterns are formed. Further, in the region where the wiring pattern of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board is not formed, an insulating region made of an insulator and a conductor are formed, and a ground region forming a ground is formed. The ground region is a betta land formed over almost the entire area other than the region where the wiring pattern and the insulating region are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board.

As shown in FIG. 30-2, more wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are arranged on the mounting surface than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction, while the solder surface is arranged as shown in FIG. 30-3. There are more wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction. Therefore, the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction are aggregated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction are aggregated on the solder surface, and when the wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction and the wiring patterns extending in the horizontal direction intersect. Designs such as bypassing wiring patterns can be reduced as much as possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-3, since many wiring patterns arranged on the solder surface extend in the same lateral direction as the long side, the distance of the wiring pattern is longer than that of the wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface. However, as mentioned above, the electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, not on the solder surface, and the relatively long wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface is hindered by the electronic components. Is avoided.

Further, when the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface is branched, one of the wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the solder surface and the other is formed on the mounting surface through the through hole. Branching is performed without bypassing one wiring pattern or crossing one wiring pattern and the other wiring pattern at the branch destination on the same surface.

FIG. 30-4 is a diagram showing a mounting surface in a state where the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-4, electronic components such as the above-mentioned game control microcomputer, input circuit, and output circuit are mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board. These electronic components include an electronic component having one or more rows of terminals consisting of a plurality of terminals arranged in one direction. Most of the electronic components including these terminal rows are arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, in the horizontal direction. As described above, on the mounting surface, the proportion of wiring patterns extending in the vertical direction is large, and the electronic components provided with the terminal rows are often arranged along the long side of the game control board, that is, arranged in the horizontal direction. By doing so, it is possible to connect to the terminal rows arranged in the horizontal direction as it is without changing the direction of the wiring pattern extending in the vertical direction.

Further, among the electronic components including the terminal train, the input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape as shown in FIG. 30-4, and a concave notch is provided on one side on the short side and the surface thereof is provided. The model number is printed, and the orientation of the component can be specified by the orientation of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. Then, as shown in FIG. 30-4, the input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right in FIG. 30-4, while the output circuit is arranged. , In Fig. 30-4, the notch is arranged to the right and the printing direction of the model number is from right to left, and these electronic components are arranged in the input circuit depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. It is possible to identify whether it is an output circuit or an output circuit.

FIG. 30-5 is a diagram showing a configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-6 is a diagram from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the branched wiring pattern.

As described above, the game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. .. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns formed on the solder surface extending in the lateral direction, and as shown in FIG. 30-5, the game control board of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from the through hole to which the terminal of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side is connected. As shown in FIG. 30-6, the data bus and the electronic components such as the input circuit and the output circuit are branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole, and the wiring pattern is formed so as to extend in the vertical direction. Connected by.

When connecting the game control microcomputer and electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits separated in the lateral direction via a data bus, first, the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the lateral direction. It is connected to the data bus on the surface, branches into a wiring pattern on the mounting surface side that extends vertically toward the electronic component through a through hole at the position where the electronic component is mounted, and is connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer and the electronic components separated in the lateral direction can be efficiently connected. Further, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, it is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components on the data bus, and the data bus and the electronic components are through. Since they are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the hole, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened, and it is less likely to be affected by noise from electronic components during this period.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction constituting the data bus are not formed in a straight line, but are divided into a plurality of wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction. The length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) is an antenna whose resonance is maximized according to the bus clock (frequency used when transmitting data on the data bus) when transmitting data on the data bus. It is formed shorter than the length (λ (bus clock) / 2). Therefore, the wiring pattern constituting the data bus has an antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, and it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted due to resonance. Furthermore, even if the length is halved of the antenna length corresponding to the bus clock, it may be reflected on the surface of the substrate and strong resonance may occur. Therefore, the length of each divided wiring pattern (L1 to L8) are formed to have a length that is not 1/2 of the antenna length at which resonance is maximized according to the bus clock, and strong resonance occurs due to reflection on the surface of the substrate. It is also prevented from emitting radio waves.

The bus clock differs depending on the game control microcomputer and oscillator to be mounted, but the lengths (L1 to L8) of each divided wiring pattern depend on the bus clock which is the maximum frequency expected. It is formed so as to be shorter than the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized, and not to be half the antenna length at which the resonance is maximized according to the bus clock at the maximum frequency. Therefore, even when data is transmitted with a bus clock lower than the expected maximum frequency, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being generated.

As shown in FIG. 30-5, the plurality of lateral wiring patterns constituting the data bus are diagonally right or diagonally left, that is, the direction of the plurality of lateral wiring patterns. They are connected across wiring patterns that extend in different directions. Further, the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction and the wiring pattern in the diagonally right direction or the diagonally left direction, which are divided into a plurality of parts, are connected by being bent at an obtuse angle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted from the bent portion of the wiring pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-5, it is mounted through a through hole (A to F shown in FIGS. 30-5) provided on the diagonal wiring pattern connecting the plurality of lateral wiring patterns. It is designed to branch into a wiring pattern on the surface side (wiring pattern connected to A to F shown in FIGS. 30-6), and is a diagonal wiring pattern that connects a plurality of horizontal wiring patterns divided into each other. The wiring patterns that make up the data bus are branched using.

In the game control board according to the first embodiment, in order to make the length of the horizontal wiring pattern shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized, the horizontal wiring pattern is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns, and a plurality of wiring patterns are divided into a plurality of wiring patterns. The horizontal wiring patterns divided into two are connected by the diagonal wiring patterns formed on the same solder surface, but the plurality of horizontal wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface side. As a configuration in which horizontal wiring patterns are connected by a separate wiring pattern, that is, horizontal wiring patterns are alternately formed on a solder surface and a mounting surface so that the length of the horizontal wiring pattern is shorter than the antenna length at which resonance is maximized. Is also good. In such a configuration, it is preferable to branch at a position where the horizontal wiring pattern switches from the solder surface or the mounting surface to the other surface. With such a configuration, the wiring pattern after branching can be bypassed. , It is possible to branch the wiring patterns that make up the data bus without crossing them on the same plane.

FIG. 30-7 is a diagram showing the configuration of a ground region formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-8 is a diagram formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the ground area.

As shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, a ground region is formed over almost the entire area other than the region where the wiring pattern and the insulating region are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board. The ground region formed on the game control board is composed of a first ground region and a second ground region electrically separated by an insulating region. On both the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground region is formed in the region on the left side of the game control board, and the second ground region is formed in the region on the right side of the game control board.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-7, wiring patterns for transmitting low voltage (Vcc (+ 5V) in this embodiment) signals such as a game control microcomputer, an input circuit, and an output circuit are connected. The electronic component (low voltage component) is mounted in the left region where the first ground region is formed, and the ground terminal of the low voltage component is connected to the first ground region. On the other hand, electronic components (high-voltage components) to which wiring patterns for transmitting high-voltage (VLD (+ 24V) in this embodiment) signals, such as drive circuits for operating motors and solenoids, are connected are the first. It is mounted in the region on the right side where the two ground regions are formed, and the ground terminal of the high voltage component is connected to the second ground region. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back from the high voltage component to the low voltage component through the ground region. Further, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, even if a potential difference temporarily occurs, they are prevented from interfering with each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-9, since a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region, the capacitor is used between the first ground region and the second ground region. Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, it is possible to prevent current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-7 and 30-8, an insulating region in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the first The ground region and the second ground region are electrically separated from each other. Further, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed so as to overlap each other, and the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the mounting surface. Since the insulating region that separates the ground region and the insulating region that separates the first ground region and the second ground region on the solder surface are also formed so as to overlap, one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface Even if a potential difference occurs temporarily, it is prevented from interfering with each other.

FIG. 30-10 is a diagram showing a configuration of a connector mounted on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-11 is a diagram showing a connector formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the wiring pattern of the periphery, and FIG. 30-12 is a figure which shows the state which the game control board in this Example is housed in a board case.

As shown in FIG. 30-10, a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN7 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the game control board near the lower side of the mounting surface. In the wiring from the game control board, the signal that triggers the lottery, the signal that defines the advantage for the player such as the lottery probability, the signal for shifting to a state where the setting value can be changed, and the setting value for changing the setting value. Wiring that inputs or outputs signals related to the advantage of the game, such as signals and signals that display information that is advantageous to the player on an external display, wiring that inputs the detection signal of the error cancellation operation, backup power supply Wiring as a supply line is included.

As shown in FIGS. 30-10, the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and is not directly connected to FIG. As shown in -11, the connector is connected to a wiring pattern formed on a solder surface, that is, a surface opposite to the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 30-10, no wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface, and information about the connector such as the connector number is printed around the wiring pattern. ing. The information printed around the mounting portions of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is not limited to the connector number, and may be configured to print information on the number of terminals, the direction of the connector, the connection destination, and the like.

As shown in FIGS. 30-11, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the solder surface is the wiring on the mounting surface through the through hole at the end opposite to the side connected to the terminal. Connected to the pattern. In particular, the through-holes a to h shown in FIGS. 30-10 and 30-11 are through-holes to which the terminals of electronic components are connected, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided in the connectors CN1 to CN7 It is provided at the place where it is first connected to the electronic component. Therefore, it is possible to connect the wiring pattern from the solder surface to the mounting surface by using the through hole for connecting to the electronic component.

As shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and 30-12 (B), the game control board is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case. The substrate case can be sealed by a one-way screw, a sealing seal, welding, or the like, and once sealed, it is difficult to open the substrate case without leaving a trace. Therefore, by attaching the game control board to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case, the structure is such that fraud against the game control board is prevented.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-12 (A) and 30-12 (B), the substrate case is provided with a covering portion that covers the area around the connectors CN1 to CN7 in a state where the game control substrate is housed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-10, the wiring pattern is not formed in the region of the mounting surface of the game control board that is covered by the covering portion of the substrate case, and the wiring pattern is formed while avoiding the region. There is. The covering portion is provided with insertion holes having substantially the same shape as the connectors CN1 to CN7, and the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed to the outside through these insertion holes so that wiring from the outside can be connected.

Even when the game control board is housed in the board case in this way, since the connectors CN1 to CN7 are connected to the wiring from the outside, a slight gap is generated around the connectors CN1 to CN7, but the connectors CN1 to CN7 The terminals provided on the above are not directly connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, that is, the surface on the side on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted, and the solder surface, that is, the surface on which the connectors CN1 to CN7 are mounted. It is designed to be connected to the wiring pattern formed on the opposite surface, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of connectors CN1 to CN7 can be short-circuited from around the part where connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case. It is designed to prevent fraudulent activities such as disconnection.

Further, the periphery of the mounting portion of the connectors CN1 to CN7 on the mounting surface is covered with the covering portion of the substrate case, and the area covered by the covering portion is the wiring connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7. None of the wiring patterns including the pattern is formed, and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals provided on the connectors CN1 to CN7 is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface in the area other than the covering portion. The wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors CN1 to CN7 is surely prevented from being short-circuited or broken from the periphery of the portion where the connectors CN1 to CN7 are exposed from the board case.

FIG. 30-13 is a circuit diagram relating to the supply of backup power to the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 30-13, Vcc (+ 5V) is generated on the power supply board and is connected to the power input terminal Vcc of the game control microcomputer mounted on the game control board. Further, Vcc (+ 5V) is branched from the line supplied to the game control microcomputer on the power supply board and connected to the charging capacitor via the backflow prevention diode, and the backflow prevention diode and the charging capacitor are connected. The line branched between them is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer.

While the electric power is being supplied, Vcc (+ 5V) is supplied as a driving power source for the game control microcomputer, and the charging capacitor is charged. On the other hand, when the power supply is stopped, the supply of Vcc (+ 5V) is stopped, so that the backup power supply VBB charged in the charging capacitor is supplied to the game control microcomputer. By receiving the supply of the backup power supply VBB, the game control microcomputer holds the data stored in the RAM included in the game control microcomputer. In this embodiment, the backup power supply is supplied from the power supply board outside the game control board, but it may be supplied from the circuit provided in the game control board.

30-14 is a diagram showing a wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-15 is a diagram formed on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the said wiring pattern, and the wiring pattern for power supply formed on the solder surface.

As shown in FIGS. 30-14, on the solder surface of the game control board, wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power and wiring patterns VBB for supplying backup power are used as wiring patterns constituting the power supply line. , Are formed. As shown in FIGS. 30-14 and 30-15, the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 are composed of a wiring pattern formed on the solder surface and a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface, and are mounted on the game control board. Connected to electronic components. On the other hand, the wiring pattern VBB is composed of only the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, as shown in FIGS. 30-14. That is, the wiring pattern VBB is connected to the backup power input terminal VBB of the game control microcomputer only through the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface without being connected to the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface. That is, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB from the power supply board is supplied is formed only on the solder surface. Therefore, the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply VBB is supplied does not need to bypass the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface, and the distance of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer can be shortened, so that noise from the outside is generated. It is less susceptible to damage and prevents the data stored in the RAM from being damaged by noise.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-15, a beta land is formed on the mounting surface where the wiring pattern VBB is formed on the solder surface side. Therefore, the noise is blocked by the beta land formed on the mounting surface, so that the wiring pattern VBB on the solder surface side is not easily affected by the noise. Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-15, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB for supplying backup power is on the mounting surface side as compared with the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 for supplying normal power. In the corresponding region of the above, the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side, particularly the wiring pattern used for signal transmission, is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern. Therefore, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side is suppressed as much as possible.

In this embodiment, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern VBB that supplies backup power is the corresponding area on the mounting surface side rather than the wiring patterns Vcc1 to 3 that supply normal power. In the configuration, the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface side is formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmission. However, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the signal that triggers the lottery. The wiring pattern in which signals related to the interests of the player are transmitted, such as, is closer to the mounting surface than the wiring pattern in which signals not directly related to the player's history, such as signals for controlling output components, are transmitted. It is used for the transmission of the signal formed on the mounting surface side by being formed at a position where there are few intersections with the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding region. The influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which signals related to the interests of the player from the wiring pattern are transmitted is suppressed as much as possible.

Further, among the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface, the wiring pattern in which the reset signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer and the wiring pattern in which the operation clock is given to the game control microcomputer are relatively important. Where the wiring pattern in which the signal is transmitted intersects the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side, compared to the wiring pattern in which other signals are transmitted. By making the configuration formed at a position where the number of signals is reduced, the influence of noise on the wiring pattern in which a relatively important signal is transmitted from the wiring pattern used for transmitting the signal formed on the mounting surface side is as much as possible. It can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-16 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the slot machine. The slot machine is equipped with game-related game parts such as a liquid crystal display, an effect control board for controlling the effect, a reel unit composed of a plurality of reels, and a hopper unit for paying out medals. When the game control board is attached to the slot machine, the surface of the game control board on the mounting surface side, that is, the surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed, is on the game component side. Installed to be placed. With such a configuration, the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

FIG. 30-17 is a diagram showing an example of a situation in which the game control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine. When the pachinko gaming machine is installed in the amusement park, it is often installed so that the back surfaces of the pachinko gaming machines face each other with other gaming devices such as other pachinko gaming machines. When the game control board is attached to the pachinko gaming machine, the game control board has a mounting surface side, that is, a surface opposite to the solder surface on which the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power is supplied is formed. It is installed so that it is placed on the device side. With such a configuration, the influence of noise emitted from other gaming devices on the wiring pattern VBB to which the backup power supply is supplied can be suppressed.

(Action effect 1)
In the game control board of this embodiment, wiring patterns are formed on both the mounting surface and the solder surface, and the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface has a ratio of wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction). The ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction) different from the one direction is larger than the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction), and the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface has the ratio of the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (left-right direction) in the first direction (up and down). It is characterized in that it is larger than the ratio of wiring patterns extending in the direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring patterns extending in the first direction (vertical direction) are aggregated on the mounting surface, and the wiring patterns extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) are aggregated on the solder surface in the first direction. When the wiring pattern extending in the (vertical direction) and the wiring pattern extending in the second direction (horizontal direction) intersect, the design such as bypassing the wiring pattern can be reduced as much as possible.

The game control board of this embodiment is a square composed of a pair of sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (horizontal direction). It is characterized by its shape. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern can be formed without waste along the shape of the game control board.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that electronic components including a terminal row composed of a plurality of terminals are arranged so that the terminal rows are arranged in a second direction (horizontal direction). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern extending in the first direction (left-right direction) can be directly connected to the electronic component.

The game control board of this embodiment has a pair of short sides (left side and right side) extending in the first direction (vertical direction) and a pair of long sides (upper side and lower side) extending in the second direction (left and right direction). It has a rectangular shape consisting of, and is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is possible to form a wiring pattern in the second direction (left-right direction) in which the distance can be long on the solder surface without being hindered by the electronic components.

The game control board of the present embodiment includes a wiring pattern in which the wiring pattern branches from one wiring pattern to two wiring patterns, and one of the two wiring patterns at the branch destination is formed on the mounting surface. The other wiring pattern is characterized in that it is formed on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, it is not necessary to bypass one wiring pattern of the branch destination or to intersect one wiring pattern of the branch destination and the other wiring pattern on the same surface, and the wiring pattern can be preferably used. Can be formed.

(Action effect 2)
The game control board of this embodiment connects a first terminal (terminal of a game control microcomputer) and a second terminal (terminals of an input circuit and an output circuit) separated in a specific direction (left-right direction) to a specific signal (terminals of an input circuit and an output circuit). A specific wiring pattern (data bus) used for transmitting input data and output data is formed, and the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). A specific length (λ / 2) in which the linear wiring pattern formed by dividing and extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by being formed shorter than. According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed by being divided into a plurality of wiring patterns consisting of straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction), and a straight line extending in a specific direction (left-right direction). The wiring pattern of each is formed shorter than the specific length (λ / 2), which is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), so that the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is formed. ) Is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data), and it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) are connected by wiring patterns extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (horizontal direction). .. According to such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which linear wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) are connected by a wiring pattern extending in a direction (diagonal direction) different from the specific direction (left-right direction). However, a wiring pattern may be formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface, and a linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) may be formed alternately on the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even in such a configuration, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be divided into straight wiring patterns extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) with a simple structure.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the specific wiring pattern (data bus) is different from the specific wiring pattern (data bus) between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) and another wiring pattern. It is characterized by branching to. According to such a configuration, a specific wiring pattern (data bus) can be suitably branched by utilizing between one wiring pattern extending in a specific direction and another wiring pattern.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction (left-right direction) has an antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency (maximum frequency assumed as a bus clock) of each specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized in that it is formed shorter than a specific length (λ / 2). According to such a configuration, the length of the linear wiring pattern extending in the specific direction (left-right direction) is shorter than the antenna length corresponding to the maximum frequency of the specific signal (input data, output data), and thus is equal to or less than the maximum frequency. Even if the signal is transmitted, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

The game control board of this embodiment has a specific length (λ / 2) in which the linear wiring pattern extending in a specific direction is the antenna length corresponding to the frequency (bus clock) of the specific signal (input data, output data). It is characterized by having a length that does not become 1/2 (λ / 4). According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern of a straight line extending in a specific direction (horizontal direction) becomes 1/2 of the specific length (λ / 2), and strong resonance occurs due to reflection from the surface of the substrate. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to prevent unintended radio waves from being emitted.

(Action effect 3)
The game control board of this embodiment has a first electronic component (low voltage component) to which a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is connected, and a second voltage (VDL (+ 24V)). The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern to which the signal is transmitted is connected, the first electronic component (low voltage component) is connected to the first ground region, and the second electronic component (second electronic component) The high voltage component) is characterized in that it is connected to a first ground region and a second ground region separated by an insulating portion. According to such a configuration, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second voltage. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the (VDL (+ 24V)) signal is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion (insulating region). Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unintended current from flowing back through the ground.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first electronic component (low voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the first voltage (Vcc (+ 5V)) is transmitted is connected to the first ground region. The second electronic component (high voltage component) to which the wiring pattern through which the signal of the second voltage (VDL (+ 24V)) is transmitted is connected is connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion. Regarding the configuration, in a configuration in which the current difference flowing through the wiring pattern connected by the first electronic component and the second electronic component is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is It may be configured to be connected to the first ground region and the second ground region separated by the insulating portion, and with such a configuration, the wiring connected by the first electronic component and the second electronic component. Even when the current difference flowing through the pattern is large, the first electronic component is connected to the first ground region and the second electronic component is connected to the second ground region, so that an unintended current flows back through the ground. Can be prevented.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that a capacitor is provided between the first ground region and the second ground region. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference is temporarily generated between the first ground region and the second ground region by the capacitor, it is possible to prevent the current from flowing from one ground region to the other ground region. ..

In the game control board of this embodiment, a first ground region is formed on one side (left side), a second ground region is formed on the other side (right side) facing one side, and a first electronic component (low voltage component) is formed. ) Is mounted in the first ground region, and the second electronic component (high voltage component) is mounted in the second ground region. According to such a configuration, since the first ground region and the second ground region are formed on the opposite sides of the game control board, it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other even if a potential difference temporarily occurs.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) in which a wiring pattern is not formed is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. It is characterized by. According to such a configuration, the insulating property between the first ground region and the second ground region can be enhanced.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on both the mounting surface and the solder surface. Even if a non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) is formed between the first ground region and the second ground region on at least one of the mounting surface and the solder surface, the first ground region and the first ground region are formed. The insulation between the second ground regions can be enhanced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the first ground region and the second ground region on the mounting surface and the first ground region and the second ground region on the soldering surface are formed in corresponding regions, respectively, and the mounting surface is formed. The non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) of the solder surface and the non-wiring pattern region (insulation region) of the solder surface are also formed in the corresponding regions. According to such a configuration, even if a potential difference is temporarily generated from one surface of the mounting surface and the solder surface to the other surface, it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

(Action effect 4)
The game control board of this embodiment is attached to the game machine in a state of being housed in the board case, and connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) for attaching wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the mounting surface. The terminals (connectors CN1 to CN7) are characterized in that they are connected to a wiring pattern formed on a solder surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface on the opposite side instead of the mounting surface on which the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are mounted. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the portion where the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are exposed from the board case.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring connected to the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is the wiring related to the advantage of the game (the signal for shifting the set value to a state where the set value can be changed, and the set value is changed. It is characterized by including a signal for inputting or outputting a signal for displaying information advantageous to the player on an external display (wiring for inputting or outputting). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent cheating related to the advantage of the game.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that information (connector number) regarding the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) is displayed around the mounting portion of the connector (connector CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. According to such a configuration, the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) are connected to the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern is formed around the mounting portion of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) on the mounting surface. Since it is not formed, by displaying the information (connector number) regarding the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) in this portion, the portion where the wiring pattern is not formed on the mounting surface can be effectively used.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the board case includes a covering portion that covers the area around the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7), and the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is as follows. It is characterized in that it is formed on a solder surface in a region covered with a covering portion. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7) is not formed on the mounting surface even in the peripheral portion of the connector (connectors CN1 to CN7), so that the connector is formed from the board case. It is possible to reliably prevent fraudulent acts such as short-circuiting or disconnecting the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) from around the exposed portion of the (connectors CN1 to CN7).

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the wiring pattern connected to the terminals of the connectors (connectors CN1 to CN7) is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface at the point where it is first connected to the electronic component. .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to connect to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface by using a through hole for connecting to an electronic component.

(Action effect 5)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components including a game control microcomputer having a storage means (RAM) are mounted on the mounting surface, and no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface, so that the game control is performed. The microcomputer for game control can hold the stored contents of the storage means (RAM) by the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) supplied by the wiring pattern, and the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) is used as the game control microcomputer. The wiring pattern (VBB) supplied to the computer is characterized in that it is formed only on the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the wiring pattern for supplying the specific power supply (backup power supply (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is formed only on the solder surface on which the electronic parts are not mounted, so that the electronic parts are bypassed. Since it is not necessary to form the data and the distance of the wiring pattern can be shortened, it is difficult to receive noise from the outside, and it is possible to prevent the data stored in the storage means (RAM) from being damaged by the noise.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the game component (liquid crystal display, effect control board that controls the effect, etc.) side related to the game. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise generated from the game component on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that it is mounted so that the mounting surface side is arranged on the other game device (other game machine) side. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise emitted from other game devices on the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer.

The game control board of this embodiment is solid in the area on the mounting surface side corresponding to the area where the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying the specific power supply (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is provided on the solder surface. It is characterized by the formation of a ground. According to such a configuration, noise from the mounting surface side can be blocked by the beta land formed on the mounting surface.

In the game control board of this embodiment, the wiring pattern (VBB) for supplying a specific power source (backup power source (VBB)) to the game control microcomputer is higher than the wiring pattern (Vcc1 to 3) for supplying another power source. It is characterized in that there are few points that intersect with the wiring pattern for transmitting signals in the corresponding area on the mounting surface side. According to such a configuration, the influence of noise from the wiring pattern for transmitting signals on the mounting surface side can be prevented as much as possible.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the present invention is not limited to this embodiment and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say.

For example, in the present embodiment, an example in which the configuration according to the present invention is applied to a game control board that controls a game is described, but another board mounted on a game machine, for example, a board that controls an effect. The configuration according to the present invention may be applied to a gaming medium, a substrate that controls the addition of gaming value, a substrate that relays between the substrates, and the like.

The structure of the game control board in the second embodiment will be described. Similar to the first embodiment, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The configuration of the game control board in the second embodiment is basically the same as the configuration of the game control board in the first embodiment, and here, a configuration different from that of the game control board of the first embodiment will be mainly described. ..

FIG. 30-18 is a diagram showing a mounting surface of the game control board in the first embodiment, and FIG. 30-19 is a diagram showing a solder surface of the game control board in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 30-18 and 30-19, the game control board is a rectangular printed circuit board composed of a pair of short sides extending in the vertical direction and a pair of long sides extending in the horizontal direction, and has an insulating property. Consists of. Further, a plurality of through holes are formed on the game control board, and a plurality of wiring patterns are formed on the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board so as to appropriately connect the through holes. Further, an insulating region and a ground region are formed in the regions where the wiring patterns of the mounting surface and the solder surface of the game control board are not formed.

Similar to the game control board of the first embodiment, the game control board of the second embodiment also has an input circuit and an output circuit mounted therein. The input circuit and the output circuit are formed in a rectangular shape and have short sides. A concave notch is provided on one side, and the model number is printed on the surface, so that the orientation of the component can be specified by the direction of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. The input circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the left side in the drawing and the model number is printed in the direction from left to right, while the output circuit is arranged so that the notch is on the right side in the drawing and the model number is printed. It is arranged so that the printing direction is from right to left, and it is possible to specify whether these electronic components are an input circuit or an output circuit depending on the position of the notch and the printing direction of the model number. There is.

FIG. 30-20 is a diagram showing a configuration of a data bus formed on the solder surface of the game control board in this embodiment, and FIG. 30-21 is a diagram from the data bus on the mounting surface of the game control board in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the branched wiring pattern.

The game control board is formed with a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit. The data bus formed on the game control board of this embodiment is composed of eight wiring patterns extending in the lateral direction formed on the solder surface, and as shown in FIG. 30-20, the game control board of the game control board. It consists of eight wiring patterns formed so as to extend laterally toward the right side from the through hole to which the terminal of the game control microcomputer mounted on the left side is connected. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern formed so as to branch to the mounting surface side through a through hole and extend in the vertical direction. ..

When connecting the game control microcomputer and the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the lateral direction via the data bus, first, the data bus on the solder surface where the terminals of the game control microcomputer extend in the lateral direction. Branch to the mounting surface side wiring pattern that extends vertically toward the input circuit or output circuit through the through hole at the position where the input circuit or output circuit is mounted, and is connected to the input circuit or output circuit. It becomes. Therefore, it is not necessary to bypass the wiring pattern branched from the data bus, and the game control microcomputer can be efficiently connected to the input circuit and the output circuit separated in the lateral direction. Further, since the wiring pattern constituting the data bus is formed on the solder surface on which the electronic components are not mounted, it is not easily affected by the noise from the electronic components on the data bus, and further, the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit Is connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through a through hole, so that the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side is shortened and is less susceptible to the influence of noise from electronic components during this period.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-22, the data bus is connected to the noise removal circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than any input circuit and output circuit connected to the data bus. Therefore, the noise on the data bus is less likely to affect the game control microcomputer.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-20, connectors CN10 to CN17 for connecting wiring from the outside of the game control board are mounted on the game control board in the vicinity of the upper side in the drawing, and a data bus is provided. The wiring pattern to be configured is formed in a region closer to the lower side in the drawing of the game control board, that is, a region closer to the other side facing the one side on which the connectors CN10 to CN17 are mounted. For this reason, the area for mounting electronic components such as input circuits and output circuits is widely secured between the connectors CN10 to CN17 where signals are input and output and the electronic components outside the game control board and the data bus. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, the game control board has an input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for controlling the game (does not trigger a lottery). Input signals from the first input circuit that detects the input of sensors and switches (detection signals of sensors and switches, etc.) and the second input components that are more important than the first input components (detection signals of sensors and switches that trigger lottery, advantageous Based on the output data from the second input circuit that detects the input of the second input circuit that detects the input of the setting value that defines the degree, the game control microcomputer, etc., the operation of the moving parts such as the solenoid and motor according to the progress of the game. The first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component, and the second output that displays various indicators, LEDs, etc. according to the progress of the game based on the output data from the game control microcomputer. The second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the parts, based on the output data from the game control microcomputer, is mounted on the game control board, and the payout rate when the game is played for a certain period of time, etc. A third output circuit that outputs an output signal to a performance indicator that displays performance is mounted.

Of these input circuits and output circuits, the first output circuit, the first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the third output circuit are connected to the data bus, and the input data and the output data are transmitted via the data bus. Is done.

As shown in FIG. 30-20, the wiring patterns constituting the data bus connected to the terminals of the game control microcomputer on the solder surface branch to the mounting surface side through through holes at a plurality of points, and are vertically formed on the mounting surface. It is connected to a wiring pattern formed in the direction. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position M in the figure is connected to the terminal of the first input circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the position N in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the third output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface side through the through hole at the positions O and P in the drawing is connected to the terminal of the first output circuit. Further, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit and branched on the mounting surface, and some wiring patterns are external as they are. It is connected to the output terminal, and the remaining wiring pattern is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position R in the figure, and then connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole at the position S in the figure. Is connected to the external output terminal.

As shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among the input circuits and output circuits connected by the shared data bus, the input circuit has a longer wiring pattern length than the output circuit to the game control microcomputer. It is connected to the data bus so that it is short. Therefore, the input data used for controlling the game is less likely to be affected by noise or the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, an output signal is output to the first output component that operates the movable portion according to the progress of the game among the plurality of output circuits connected by the shared data bus. The length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter in the first output circuit that outputs the game than in the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the data bus so that it becomes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like and affecting the operation of the movable portion according to the progress of the game.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30-20 and 30-21, among a plurality of output circuits connected by a shared data bus, the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator is other than the performance indicator. Data so that the length of the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the display (second output component) that displays according to the progress of the game. It is connected to the bus. For this reason, it is difficult for the content of the performance display to be illegally modified due to the arrangement of illegal parts or the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30-21, from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side, the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole at the position Q in the figure corresponds to the progress of the game. It is connected to the terminal of the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that outputs, and branches on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern outputs the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device. It is connected to the external output terminal for outputting to. In this way, it is connected to the second output circuit in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the external output terminal Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each of the wiring patterns connected to the wiring pattern, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The wiring pattern on the mounting surface side connected through the through hole from the wiring pattern constituting the data bus on the solder surface side outputs an output signal to the second output component that outputs according to the progress of the game. In addition to being connected to the terminals of the two output circuits, the wiring pattern is branched on the mounting surface, and the branched wiring pattern is also connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal to the external device according to the progress of the game. Well, even with such a configuration, in order to output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. By branching the wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit and the wiring pattern connected to the output circuit for outputting the output signal according to the progress of the game to the external device, it is connected to a plurality of output circuits. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the mounting surface to the solder surface side in order to branch to each of the wiring patterns, the wiring pattern is simply formed.

The second input circuit of the input circuits is not connected to the data bus, and the input data is directly transmitted to the game control microcomputer without going through the data bus. As shown in FIG. 30-21, the wiring pattern connected to the terminal of the game control microcomputer on the mounting surface is once connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side through the through hole at the position T in the drawing, and is connected to the wiring pattern on the solder surface side. At the position of, it is connected to the wiring pattern on the mounting surface side again through the through hole, and is connected to the terminal of the second input circuit.

In this way, the first input circuit that detects the input of the input signal from the first input component, which is relatively less important among the input components used for controlling the game, is connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. On the other hand, the second input circuit that detects the input of the input signal from the second input component, which is more important than the first input component, is not connected to the data bus and is directly connected without going through the data bus. It is connected to a game control microcomputer, and the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is a data bus through which input data from other input circuits and output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the game control microcomputer without intervention, the input data based on the important input signal is not affected by the input data from other input circuits or the output data to the output circuit, and is sent to the game control microcomputer. It will be transmitted.

(Action effect 6)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. According to such a configuration, the input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer is the game control microcomputer. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from It is possible to prevent the data from being affected by noise or the like.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which the input circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output circuit. However, the output circuit is an input circuit. It may be configured to be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the game control microcomputer. With such a configuration, it is based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. An output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) transmits input data based on an input signal from the electronic component (input component) used for controlling the game control computer to the game control computer. Since the output data is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the input circuit to be used, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The output circuit is a first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. The first output circuit includes a second output circuit that outputs an output signal to a second output component that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the game control microcomputer. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game is the second output that displays according to the progress of the game. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the parts, the output data is affected by noise etc. It is possible to prevent the movement of the movable part from being affected according to the progress.

The game control board of the present embodiment has a configuration in which the first output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the second output circuit. The output circuit may be connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit. With such a configuration, the game progresses. The second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the second output component that displays is from the first output circuit that outputs the output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. Since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shortened, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise and the like, which affects the display according to the progress of the game. can.

Further, like the game control board of the first embodiment, the first ground region on which the low voltage component is mounted is formed on the left side where the game control microcomputer is arranged, and the high voltage component is mounted on the right side. When the two ground regions are formed, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first output component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game often belongs to the high voltage component. The second output circuit, which is mounted in the two ground regions and outputs an output signal to the second output component that displays according to the progress of the game, is often mounted in the first ground region because it belongs to the low voltage component. The Rukoto. In such a configuration, the second output circuit is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the first output circuit, and the second output circuit is connected to the first ground. By mounting it in the region, it is not necessary to mount the second output circuit, which is a low-voltage component, together with the first output circuit, which is a high-voltage component, in the second ground region, and it is possible to prevent the second output circuit from being overloaded. can.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control microcomputer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface, and the data bus is formed on the solder surface, and the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus through the through hole is output on the mounting surface according to the progress of the game. It is characterized in that it branches into a wiring pattern connected to a second output circuit for performing the operation and a wiring pattern connected to an external output terminal that outputs an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device. According to such a configuration, the second output for performing the output according to the progress of the game on the mounting surface side by utilizing the wiring pattern of the mounting surface connected from the data bus formed on the solder surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern connected to the circuit and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal for outputting to the external device, in order to branch to each of these wiring patterns. Since it is not necessary to branch from the data bus formed on the solder surface to the mounting surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

In the game control board of this embodiment, a data bus shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the game control computer and transmission of output data from the game control microcomputer to the output circuit is formed. The first input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the first input component used for controlling the game control microcomputer to the game control microcomputer, and the first input circuit used for controlling the game control microcomputer. 2 The second input circuit that transmits the input data based on the input signal from the input component to the game control computer, and the first output component and the second output component based on the output data transmitted from the game control computer. The first output circuit, the second output circuit, and the first input circuit, the first output circuit, and the second output circuit are connected to the game control microcomputer via the data bus. The second input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to a game control microcomputer without going through a data bus. According to such a configuration, the input data based on the input signal from the second input component is for game control without going through the data bus through which the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Since it is transmitted to the microcomputer, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the game control microcomputer without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit. ..

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface and a data bus is formed on the solder surface. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to the mounting surface on the opposite side to the solder surface on which the data bus is formed through the through hole. It is supposed to be. According to such a configuration, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.

In the game control board of this embodiment, connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted near one side (upper side), and the data bus faces one side of the game control board. It is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side). According to such a configuration, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector (connectors CN10 to CN17) and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively utilized. ..

The game control board of this embodiment is equipped with a performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and the third output circuit that outputs an output signal to the performance indicator outputs an output signal to other indicators. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the game control microcomputer is shorter than that of the output second output circuit. According to such a configuration, the third output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance display is more up to the game control microcomputer than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal to the other display. Since the wiring pattern is short, it is possible to make it difficult to modify the display contents due to the placement of unauthorized parts.

The game control board of this embodiment is characterized in that the input circuit and the output circuit are mounted so that the orientations of the components are different. With such a configuration, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the data bus is connected to the noise reduction circuit at a position closer to the game control microcomputer than the input circuit and the output circuit. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise on the game control microcomputer.

Although the second embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as that of Example 1 has the same effect as that described in Example 1. Further, the modified example exemplified for Example 1 can also be applied to Example 2.

The structure of the game control board in the third embodiment will be described. Similar to the first and second embodiments, the game control board has a configuration in which electronic components are mounted on one surface, electronic components are not mounted on the other surface, and terminals included in the electronic components are soldered. The game control board in the third embodiment is characterized by the structure of the electronic component and the through hole to be mounted, and here, the structure of the electronic component and the through hole will be described.

30-23 are perspective views showing the structure of the specific electronic component mounted on the game control board in the third embodiment, FIG. 30-23 is a perspective view from above of the specific electronic component, and FIG. 30B is a perspective view from above. , It is a perspective view from the bottom of a specific electronic component.

The specific electronic component is a relatively large electronic component such as a key switch, and as shown in FIGS. 30-23 (A) and 30-23 (B), the specific electronic component is fixed to the substrate at the bottom of the specific electronic component. For the purpose, fixing terminals 1 and 2 that are not used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components, and connection terminals that are connected to the wiring pattern of the board and used for propagating signals and power of specific electronic components. Is provided. Further, the model number of the specific electronic component is engraved or printed above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 on the side surface of the specific electronic component.

In this embodiment, a key switch having both a fixing terminal and a connecting terminal is illustrated as a specific electronic component, but other electronic components may be applied as the specific electronic component, or may be applied. An electronic component that does not have a fixing terminal but only a connecting terminal may be applied as a specific electronic component.

The through-holes provided on the game control board are usually composed of through-holes and specific through-holes. As shown in FIG. 30-24 (A), the through hole is usually subjected to copper plating, which is a conductor, from the solder surface to the inner peripheral surface of the through hole, so that the through hole becomes a mounting surface and a solder surface. It is a through hole that conducts with. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (B), the specific through hole is a through hole in which the inner peripheral surface of the through hole is not copper-plated and the through hole is not conductive between the mounting surface and the solder surface. be.

Normally, when soldering to the through hole from the solder surface side, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (A), the through hole is copper-plated, so that the solder in the through hole reaches the mounting surface. Although it flows up, when soldering to a specific through hole from the solder surface side, as shown in FIG. 30-24 (B), since the through hole is not copper-plated, the inside of the through hole is filled. The solder does not flow up and the solder does not reach the mounting surface.

In this embodiment, the specific electronic component is fixed by inserting the fixing terminals 1 and 2 into the specific through hole, inserting the connection terminal into the normal through hole, and soldering from the solder surface side.

In this way, the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are inserted into the specific through holes and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side. Therefore, the solder does not reach the mounting surface. It is possible to prevent problems such as the model number printed or engraved above the fixing terminals 1 and 2 being hidden by solder because it rises too much toward the mounting surface on which the component is mounted.

In particular, since the model number is hidden by solder, there is a risk that it cannot be found even if the part is replaced illegally, and if the model number is hidden in the type test, the part configuration cannot be specified and the test is not passed, and approval There is a risk that you will not be able to receive the solder, or you may not be allowed to install it in the game store because you cannot confirm the model number when installing it in the game store. By fixing with, such a problem can be prevented.

On the other hand, since the fixing terminals 1 and 2 are terminals that are not used for propagating signals and electric power of specific electronic components, a problem occurs even if the electrical connection is weakened when soldering through a specific through hole. Never. On the other hand, since the connection terminal is usually inserted into the through hole and fixed by soldering from the solder surface side, the electrical connection can be ensured when the solder reaches the mounting surface.

(Action effect 7)
In the game control board of this embodiment, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface of the mounting surface and the soldering surface, and a wiring pattern is formed on the mounting surface and the soldering surface. A terminal is inserted through a through hole that penetrates the surface and the solder surface, and the through hole and the terminal are fixed by soldering, and a specific through hole is formed in which a specific electronic component is fixed among a plurality of electronic components. The specific through hole is characterized in that the solder surface of the mounting surface does not conduct, and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. According to such a configuration, the specific through hole is soldered because the mounting surface and the solder surface do not conduct with each other and the solder does not reach the mounting surface when the terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered from the solder surface. At that time, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and causing a defect.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered. According to such a configuration, since it is the terminals for fixing the specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) that are soldered to the specific through holes, the solder reaches the mounting surface. By not doing so, there is no problem even if the electrical connection is weakened.

The game control board of this embodiment has a configuration in which terminals for fixing specific electronic components (fixing terminals 1 and 2) are inserted into specific through holes and soldered to the specific through holes. A terminal (connection terminal) that propagates the signal or power of the component may be inserted and soldered. According to such a configuration, the solder rises too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted. It is possible to prevent problems caused by short-circuiting of terminals that propagate signals and power of specific electronic components with other terminals.

The game control board of the present embodiment is characterized in that the model number of the specific electronic component is displayed (printed or engraved) above the terminals (fixing terminals 1 and 2). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the solder from rising too much toward the mounting surface on which the electronic component is mounted and hiding the model number of the specific electronic component.

Although the third embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range not deviating from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configurations as those of Examples 1 and 2 have the same effects as those described in Examples 1 and 2. Further, the modifications illustrated with reference to Examples 1 and 2 can also be applied to Example 3.

(Invention of Feature 053SG)
As described above, the feature unit 053SG includes the inventions shown below. That is, conventionally, as described in JP-A-2016-93428, for example, a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine is generally provided with a substrate on which an electronic device is mounted. A board of this type has been proposed in which data is input / output between a control means such as a CPU and another electronic device using a single data bus. In this type of substrate, there are various problems regarding the design of the wiring pattern. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine in which the wiring pattern of the substrate is preferably formed, the gaming machine of (1) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The input circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the output circuit.
According to this feature, an input circuit that transmits input data based on an input signal from an electronic component used for controlling the control means to the control means outputs to the electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the output circuit that outputs the signal, it is possible to prevent the input data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (2) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1).
The board (game control board) is characterized in that electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface) and the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface).
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the influence of noise from electronic components on the data bus.

The gaming machine of (3) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to (1) or (2).
The data bus, the input circuit, and the output circuit are connected by a wiring pattern branched to a surface (mounting surface) opposite to the surface (solder surface) on which the data bus is formed through a through hole. It is a feature.
According to this feature, the distance of the wiring pattern from the data bus to the input circuit and the output circuit is shortened, so that the influence of noise can be reduced.
The gaming machine of (4) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3).
On the board (game control board), connectors (connectors CN10 to CN17) for attaching wiring from the outside of the board are mounted in the vicinity of one side (upper side), and the data bus is the board (game). The control board) is characterized in that it is formed in a region closer to the other side (lower side) facing the one side.
According to this feature, an area for mounting electronic components such as an input circuit and an output circuit can be secured between the connector and the data bus, so that the board area can be effectively used.

The gaming machine of (5) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (4).
A performance indicator that displays the performance of the gaming machine is mounted on the board (game control board).
The output circuit (third output circuit) that outputs an output signal to the performance display is more like the control means (game control) than the output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to another display. It is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the computer) is shortened.
According to this feature, the output circuit that outputs the output signal to the performance indicator has a shorter wiring pattern to the control means than the output circuit that outputs the output signal to other indicators, which is an illegal component. It is possible to make it difficult to improperly modify the display contents due to the arrangement of the above.

The gaming machine of (6) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5).
The input circuit and the output circuit are characterized in that they are mounted on the substrate so that the orientations of the components are different.
According to this feature, the difference between the input circuit and the output circuit can be easily grasped.

The gaming machine (7) of the feature unit 053SG is the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6).
The data bus is characterized in that it is connected to a noise reduction circuit at a position closer to the control means (game control microcomputer) than the input circuit and the output circuit.
According to this feature, the influence of noise on the control means can be prevented.

The gaming machine of (8) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit outputs to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second electronic component (second electronic component) that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal and the control means (microcomputer for game control). Includes a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to (two output components).
The first output circuit (first output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (game control microcomputer) is shorter than that of the second output circuit (second output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the first output circuit that outputs an output signal to the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game becomes the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than the second output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. and can move according to the progress of the game. It is possible to prevent the operation of the part from being affected.

The gaming machine of (9) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
In the board (game control board), electronic components are mounted only on the first surface (mounting surface), the data bus is formed on the second surface (solder surface), and the data bus is connected through a through hole. The first wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the second output circuit) for outputting the wiring pattern of the first surface (mounting surface) on the first surface (mounting surface) according to the progress of the game. It is characterized by branching into a second wiring pattern (wiring pattern connected to the external output terminal) for outputting an output signal according to the progress of the game to an external device.
According to this feature, the first surface side is used to output according to the progress of the game by utilizing the wiring pattern of the first surface connected from the data bus formed on the second surface through the through hole. Since the wiring pattern and the output signal according to the progress of the game are branched into the second wiring pattern for outputting to the external device, they are formed on the second surface to branch into the first wiring pattern and the second wiring pattern respectively. Since it is not necessary to branch from the generated data bus to the first surface side, the wiring pattern can be simply formed.

The gaming machine (10) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
A first input for transmitting input data based on an input signal from a first electronic component (first input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) to the control means (game control microcomputer). Input data based on input signals from the circuit (first input circuit) and the second electronic component (second input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control). A third electronic component (first output component, second output) based on the second input circuit (second input circuit) transmitted to the (microcomputer) and the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). Includes an output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to a component).
The first input circuit (first input circuit) and the output circuit (first output circuit, second output circuit) are connected to the control means (game control microcomputer) via the data bus.
The second input circuit (second input circuit) is characterized in that it is connected to the control means (microcomputer for game control) without going through the data bus.
According to this feature, the input data based on the input signal from the second electronic component is transmitted to the control means without going through the data bus to which the input data from another input circuit and the output data to the output circuit are transmitted. Therefore, the input data based on the important input signal can be transmitted to the control means without being affected by the input data from other input circuits and the output data to the output circuit.

The gaming machine of (11) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit is characterized in that it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the input circuit.
According to this feature, an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component based on the output data transmitted from the control means outputs the input data based on the input signal from the electronic component used for controlling the control means. Since the data bus is connected so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the input circuit transmitted to the control means, it is possible to prevent the output data from being affected by noise or the like.

The gaming machine of (12) of the feature unit 053SG is
It is a gaming machine that can play games,
Input data based on input signals from a control means (game control microcomputer) and an electronic component (input component) used for controlling the control means (game control microcomputer) is input to the control means (game control microcomputer). ), And an output circuit that outputs an output signal to an electronic component (output component) based on the output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). , Equipped with a board (game control board) on which a wiring pattern is formed,
The wiring pattern is shared for transmission of input data from the input circuit to the control means (game control microcomputer) and transmission of output data from the control means (game control microcomputer) to the output circuit. Including the data bus to be
The output circuit outputs to a first electronic component (first output component) that operates a movable portion according to the progress of the game based on output data transmitted from the control means (game control microcomputer). A second electronic component (second electronic component) that displays according to the progress of the game based on the output data transmitted from the first output circuit (first output circuit) that outputs a signal and the control means (microcomputer for game control). Includes a second output circuit (second output circuit) that outputs an output signal to (two output components).
The second output circuit (second output circuit) is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means (microcomputer for game control) is shorter than that of the first output circuit (first output circuit). It is characterized by being done.
According to this feature, the second output circuit that outputs an output signal to the second electronic component that displays according to the progress of the game becomes the first electronic component that operates the movable part according to the progress of the game. On the other hand, since it is connected to the data bus so that the wiring pattern to the control means is shorter than that of the first output circuit that outputs the output signal, the output data is affected by noise etc. and is displayed according to the progress of the game. Can be prevented from affecting the.

In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming ball having a predetermined number of balls is inside the gaming machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. Further, the game machine capable of playing a game may be at least one that plays a game, and may be a general game machine as well as a pachinko game machine or a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention also has an advantage when the first identification information is variablely displayed and the second identification information is variablely displayed and a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A storage unit (for example, a ball tank forming unit 201) that is a game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot game state) and can store a game medium (for example, a game ball P). And a payout portion (for example, a payout device 200) capable of paying out the game medium, and a guide passage (for example, a first guide passage) in which the upper surface is opened and the game medium of the storage portion is guided to the payout portion. It is provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion (for example, the first guide passage forming portion 202 and the second guide passage forming portion 204) forming the guide passage forming portion) and the guiding passage forming portion. A state control means capable of controlling a cover unit (for example, a first cover body 310, a second cover body 320, a third cover body 330) and a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, the portion for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 36-19, step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. A portion), an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, a portion for executing step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-13). The cover portion is provided with a predetermined limiting portion (for example, for example, for limiting the fall of the screw members (for example, screw members N1 to N6 and N11 to N16) that have fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion. Long holes 316A to 316C, recessed grooves 326A to 326C, recesses 336) are provided (see FIGS. 22 and 24), and the screw member dropped into the guidance passage forming portion is provided with the screw member dropped into the guiding passage forming portion to the payout portion. A plurality of specific restriction units (for example, holes 271A to 271H) for restricting movement are provided (see FIGS. 11, 12, and 27), and the state control means is the numerical information updated by the update means. Is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100 IWS 74 in the game control microcomputer 100, step 100 The part that executes 100IWS75, the figure As shown in 36-17, the portion where step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100),
The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). , The part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion from falling into the guide passage forming portion. Further, it is possible to prevent the screw member mixed in the guide passage forming portion from being mixed in the payout portion. In addition, the relief of the player can be preferably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

That is, by preventing the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion, it is possible to make the gaming machine less likely to break down, and the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second case. Since the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the identification information is executed, for example, the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Since the numerical information reaches the special number of times more easily and the player is more likely to be rescued than in the case of doing so, the motivation of the game can be increased. That is, it is possible to provide a game machine that is less likely to break down when installed in a game hall and can improve the player's motivation to play.

Further, as an example of the form of the gaming machine which can prevent the screw member from falling and being mixed in the guide passage forming portion and the payout portion and can preferably realize the relief of the player, the first identification information can be variably displayed and the first identification information can be displayed. 2 A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of identification information and controlling to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game state) when a specific display result (for example, a big hit symbol) is derived and displayed, and is more than a normal state. A portion for executing step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17, which can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is likely to be executed. As shown in FIG. 36-19, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS537) and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (for example, FIG. 36-). As shown in 13, the game control microcomputer 100 includes a portion for executing step 100 IWS71), and the state control means has a specific value in which the numerical information updated by the update means corresponds to a special number of times. When the special condition is satisfied, the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion in which step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, FIG. 36-17. As shown, in the game control microcomputer 100, the portion that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173), the updating means can be used when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is performed. A game machine whose numerical information is updated depending on the case where it is executed (for example, a portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-13) can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of a form example of these gaming machines will be described as another form example.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 31, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for advancing the game (including various flags, various timer states, etc.), as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and an effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 32 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of times jackpots have occurred) and start information (starting) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal figure reservations is displayed by turning on the normal figure hold display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 32 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the judgment result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, the look-ahead judgment, etc. is made to the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 32 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a definite special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. The special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which the determination values to be compared with the random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening by starting the execution of the round in the big hit game state based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set upper limit execution number, and a jackpot game state when the upper limit execution number is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Main operation of production control board 12)
Next, the main operation of the effect control board 12 will be described. When the effect control board 12 receives the power supply voltage from the power source board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 34 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71) to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and press the effect control board 12. Set the registers of the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, the initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and waits.

Further, on the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, among the input ports included in the I / O 125, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and the command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that which effect control command is received and the content specified by the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display the background according to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitting body such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decorative LED, and a movable body 32. Controls are performed to operate various production devices such as the driving operation of the LED. Further, regarding the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices, determination, determination, setting, etc. are performed according to the effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the effect control process process in step S76, the effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by the software. After that, the process returns to the process of step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 34 as the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 35, the effect control CPU 120 first executes the read-ahead notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the hold display is executed based on the number of hold storages specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command or the like for designating the start of the variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. are included. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is to be started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol (fixed decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol, the reach effect, and various types are based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command. It is determined whether or not various effects such as a notice effect are executed, their modes, and the execution start timing. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) that reflects the determination result and the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of the decorative symbol, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is completed. The display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 in response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , Driving the movable body 32, outputting voice and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and commanding the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal). Various effect controls are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED according to the output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of the decorative symbol is read from the effect control pattern, or a command is received from the main board 11 to specify that the fixed decorative symbol is to be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, the final decorative symbol, which is the display result of the decorative symbol, is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", and the effect process during variable display ends.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command that specifies to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when the effect control command for specifying the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received, if the command specifies the start of the big hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is set to "6". Update to. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit game state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small hit medium effect process. In addition, when the reception waiting time of the command elapses without receiving the command specifying to start the big hit game state or the small hit game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the effect process flag is updated, the waiting process for hitting the special figure ends.

The small hit medium effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit medium effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the set content. .. Further, in the small hit middle effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the small hit game state is terminated, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. Update to a certain "5" and end the small hit medium production process.

The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to, for example, the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the setting contents. To execute. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end effect process is terminated.

The jackpot effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this big hit middle effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the big hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the big hit game state based on the set content. Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the ending effect process in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify that the jackpot game state is to be terminated. Update to 7 ”and end the production process during the big hit.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending effect process ends.

(Modified example of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic explanation is a pay-out type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the gaming media are enclosed and points are given based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed gaming machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko game machine 1 is shown as the game machine, but a medal is inserted and a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player When the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by, if the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine equipped with one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the programs and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, one of the expressions for comparison of various ratios such as the execution ratio of the production (expressions such as "high", "low", and "differentiate") is "0%". It may be included. For example, one may have a proportion of "0%" and the other may have a proportion of "100%" or less than "100%".

(Explanation of feature 108IW)
Next, the feature portion 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In the feature unit 108IW, the gaming state is controlled to either a normal state, a time saving state, or a probabilistic state (also controlled in the time saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special figure fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, and the average normal map fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the normal state, as compared with the normal state. There is a high probability that you will be hit by the average in the ordinary game. For example, while the probability of hitting a normal figure is 10% in the normal state, the probability of hitting a normal figure is increased to 90% in the time saving state, and a game ball wins in the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). It will be easier to do. Not limited to such an aspect, for example, in the time saving state, the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening) can be obtained by lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B as compared with the normal state. It may be configured so that the game ball can easily win a prize.

Further, in this example, in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a big hit (big hit probability) is increased as compared with the normal state and the time saving state. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

Further, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result becomes a big hit and is controlled to the probabilistic change state or the time saving state after the big hit game ends, even if the variable display result is out of order, the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. It may be controlled to a shorter time based on what has been done.

Further, in this example, even if the fluctuation display of a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) is finished after the power is turned on to the gaming machine, after the big hit occurs, after the time reduction occurs, and after the relief time reduction occurs, the next big hit Even if the time reduction does not occur, it may be controlled to the time reduction state (relief time reduction).

In the time saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and (3) opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning opening). Control to lengthen and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol can be performed, but all of those (1) to (4) may be controlled, or (1) to (1) to It is not necessary to control a part of (4). For example, which of the following (1) to (4) may be controlled may differ between the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be the same.

Further, for example, in a low base state, the probability of hitting a normal figure may be 1/1, or the probability of hitting a normal figure may be extremely low and the probability of hitting a normal figure may be substantially 1/1. That is, when the relief time is shortened, even if the control of the above (1) is not performed, a part or all of the above (2) to (4) are controlled so that the high base state is obtained. You may.

It is preferable that the number of fluctuations n until the relief time is controlled and the number of time reductions N in the relief time are defined as follows.
2.5P ≤ n ≤ 3.0P
0.4P ≤ N ≤ 3.8P
(P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time reductions N is 120 to 1140. As will be described later, in this example, in the case of the set value "6" having the highest jackpot probability, the jackpot probability is about 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time reductions N is 108 to. It becomes 1026. Further, in the case of the set value "1" having the lowest jackpot probability, since the jackpot probability is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time reductions N is 127 to 1212. In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time reductions N are both set to "800", and the above provisions are satisfied regardless of which setting value is set.

(Example 1)
Next, the gaming machine according to the first embodiment in the feature unit 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36-1 to 36-47.

(Board composition)
FIG. 36-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the feature portion 108IW. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 108IW, in addition to the board surface configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. 36-1, a right-handed LED 100IW10 is provided below the normal drawing hold indicator 25C. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 36-1, a right-handed notification LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-1, the fourth symbol display devices 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left side and the right side of the image display device 5, respectively. Of these, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display that executes the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display 100IW21a and 21b are composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the two LEDs are alternately turned on and off to execute the variable display of the fourth symbol. NS.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature unit 108IW, instead of the passing gate 41 shown in FIG. 1, a passing game ball can pass to the right side of the image display device 5. A gate 100 IW41 is provided. In the feature unit 108IW, the normal drawing game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 100IW41. Therefore, in the feature unit 108IW, since the probability of hitting a normal figure increases in the probability variation state or the time saving state, it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the main feature unit 108IW, in the normal state, it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Big hit probability, time saving loss probability)
36-2 and 36-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 36-2 shows the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. Further, FIG. 36-3 shows the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, it is configured so that it can be set to any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value by executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process. Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, in this example, a case is shown in which the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Not only when the setting can be changed in 6 steps, for example, the setting may be changed in 2 to 5 steps, or the setting may be changed in 7 or more steps.

As shown in FIGS. 36-2 (A) and 36-3 (A), the non-probability change state (low) is performed both when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" is the lowest with the jackpot probability "205/65536" (about 1/319), which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "242/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/270), which is the most advantageous setting for the player.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 (B) and 36-3 (B), the probability change state (probability change state) in both the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol. In the high probability state), the case where the set value is "1" is the lowest (about 1/32) with the jackpot probability "2050/65536", which is the most disadvantageous setting for the player. Then, the jackpot probability increases in the order of the set value "2", the set value "3", the set value "4", and the set value "5", and the jackpot probability "2420/65536" is the highest when the set value is "6". It is high (about 1/27), which is the most advantageous setting for the player. Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the probabilistic state as compared with the non-probability state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-2, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "164/65536" (about 1/400). Further, as shown in FIG. 36-3, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, it does not matter which of the set values "1" to "6" is set (furthermore, whether it is in a probabilistic state). Regardless of whether it is in a non-probability state), the time saving loss probability is constant as "328/65536" (about 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time reduction is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, even when the jackpot probability is different depending on the set value as described above and the time reduction probability is set to be constant, no time reduction is lost. By making the probabilities different for the set values "1" to "6", the number of determined values for each set value may be matched.

In addition, it may be configured to be controllable to a small hit game state. When the small hit is also determinable, for example, the small hit probability may be constant regardless of any of the set values "1" to "6".

Further, when the small hit is also configured to be determinable, it may be configured so that there is a small hit with a time reduction that is controlled to a time reduction state triggered by the small hit.

The examples shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3 are examples, and various modes can be considered as methods for setting the jackpot probability and the time saving loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol. When the display is executed, the case where the time saving loss probability is about 1/200 is shown, but conversely, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving loss probability is about 1/200. When executing the variation display of the second special symbol, the time saving loss probability may be configured to be about 1/400.

(Big hit type judgment table)
FIG. 36-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 36-4 (A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 36-4 (B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 36-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 36-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining the type of jackpot to be either "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot".

The "normal jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to a time saving state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the time saving state, the time saving state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is finished or the next big hit occurs.

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

The "sudden probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state of two rounds and shifts to the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state. When the state shifts to the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is maintained until the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed or the next big hit occurs. In this example, when it is controlled to the probabilistic state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probability variable jackpot", 29 seconds have passed or a predetermined number (10 in this example) of games in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game. The large winning opening is controlled to be open until the ball wins (therefore, the long-term opening of the large winning opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "sudden change jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (hence, a short period of time for the jackpot). Opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "sudden change jackpot", it is practically impossible to expect a prize in the big prize opening, and it can be made to appear as if the player suddenly changed to the probability change state.

As shown in FIG. 36-4 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as a "normal big hit" with a probability of 40%, and 40%. It is determined to be a "probability change jackpot" with a probability, and is determined to be a "sudden change jackpot" with a probability of 20%. Further, as shown in FIG. 36-4 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and a big hit is obtained, it is determined as a "normal big hit" with a probability of 40%, 55. With a% probability, it is determined as a "probability change jackpot", and with a 5% probability, it is determined as a "sudden change jackpot".

(Time saving type judgment table)
FIG. 36-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 36-5 (A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 36-5 (B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 36-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type as one of "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIG. 36-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on a random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a symbol that is out of time. , It is a table referred to for determining the time saving type as one of "time saving loss A", "time saving loss B", or "time saving loss C".

As shown in FIGS. 36-5 (A) and 36-5 (B), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed and the time is out of time, and when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the time is shortened. In any case of loss, there is a 1/3 chance that it will be determined as "time reduction A", a 1/3 probability that it will be determined as "time reduction B", and a 1/3 probability that it will be "time reduction C". Is decided.

In the example shown in FIG. 36-5, various modes can be considered as a method of determining the time saving type. For example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is determined to be out of time, the probability of determining "time reduction out of C" is increased, while when the variation display of the second special symbol is determined to be out of time, "time reduction is out". The determination ratio of the time saving type may be different between the case of executing the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of executing the variable display of the second special symbol, such as increasing the determination probability of "missing A".

Further, for example, when the time reduction is configured so that the time reduction can be determined even during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction, the time reduction counter or the like may be uniformly configured so as not to be overwritten even if the time reduction is lost, or the time reduction deviation symbol may be configured. Depending on the type, the time reduction counter or the like may be overwritten or not overwritten.

FIG. 36-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving type. As shown in FIG. 36-6, in this example, in the normal state, the time reduction state is controlled to 100 times when the time reduction is out of A, and the time reduction is 50 times when the time reduction is out of B. It is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times, and when it becomes "time saving out of C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 30 times. Further, in the time saving state, when "time saving loss A" occurs, the time saving state is controlled until the next big hit, and when "time saving loss B" occurs, the time saving state is controlled to 200 times, and "time saving loss". When it becomes "C", it is controlled to the time saving state of 100 times of time saving. Further, in the normal state and the time saving state, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to 800 times.

In this example, as will be described later, the time reduction may not be determined in the probabilistic state. Further, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where the time reduction is determined to be out of time even in the time reduction state due to the relief time reduction. Further, in this example, as will be described later, if a big hit does not occur even after finishing the variation display of 800 times after being controlled to the time saving state of 800 times by the relief time saving, the relief time is shortened again. It is controlled to a time saving state (relief time saving) of 800 times. Therefore, the number of time reductions due to the relief time reduction is substantially until the next big hit occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction arrival rate for each set value will be described. The relief time reduction arrival rate is the rate controlled to the time reduction state via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by fluctuating n times (800 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot game state, the relief time saving arrival rate K is as follows. It can be calculated in this way.
K = (1-ML) n = {(P-1) ÷ P} n
(K = Relief time reduction arrival rate, P = Big hit probability ML denominator, n = Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the set value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 8.1%, and if the set value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is Since it is about 1/310, the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 7.5%, and if the set value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.9%. If the set value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 6.3%, and if the set value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.7%, and if the set value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the relief time reduction arrival rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the jackpot probability is, the higher the relief time reduction arrival rate is. As a result, the player can be rescued even if the set value has a low jackpot probability.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case of a time reduction deviation is not limited to that shown in FIG. 36-6. For example, even when the same time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, it may be configured to control so that the number of time-savings is 100 times in the normal state and the time-saving state. Further, for example, even when the same time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving number is controlled to 100 times in the normal state, and the time saving number is controlled to 0 times in the time saving state (that is,). It may be configured to fall from the time saving state to the normal state). Various modes can be considered as a method of controlling the number of time reductions in the case where the time reduction is lost.

(Variation pattern table)
36-7 and 36-8 are explanatory views showing a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature portion 108IW. Of these, FIG. 36-7 (A) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table A for big hits. Further, FIG. 36-7 (B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state. Further, FIG. 36-7 (C) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 36-7 (D) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table D for deviation in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation.

Further, FIG. 36-8 (E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for the deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving. Further, FIGS. 36-8 (F) and 36-8 (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for deviation within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 36-8 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. Further, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 36-8 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before the relief time reduction, which is selected when the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more.

Further, FIG. 36-8 (H) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table H for deviation in the probabilistic state. However, in this example, even in the probabilistic change state or the time saving state, when the number of reserved storages is not 1 or more (when there is no reserved storage), the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table B.

Further, FIG. 36-8 (I) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table I for removing the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time. Further, FIG. 36-8 (J) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table J for the jackpot of the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time.

As shown in FIG. 36-7 (A), in this example, in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PB2. It is determined to be one of -3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (B), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the normal state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (C), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation. It is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (D), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the time reduction state controlled via the time reduction deviation, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation), It is determined to be one of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (E), in this example, when there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is used as the fluctuation pattern. , The fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined.

As shown in FIGS. 36-7 (C), 36-7 (D), and 36-8 (E), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and fluctuation are observed in the time-saving state. The rate at which the pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than in the normal state. Further, even in the same time saving state, in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) is 80 as compared with the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. It is as high as%, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened fluctuation) is as high as 99%, which is the same as in the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation or the jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With such a configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit does not occur for a long period of time), the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (Extremely shortened fluctuation) increases the rate at which the fluctuation display is executed, and shortens the period until the next big hit is controlled, so that the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-7 (C), 36-7 (D), and 36-8 (E), in this example, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is compared with that of this example. The selection probability is as high as 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. Further, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are different from the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot. ) Will not be determined and Super Reach will not be performed. That is, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot, the super reach is not executed at the time of the loss, and the average fluctuation time becomes shorter. There is. With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach will be missed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, since the period until the next big hit is controlled is shortened, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest. In this example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the super reach is not executed at the time of disconnection, but it may be configured to be executed. For example, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the super reach may be executed at a lower rate than in the time saving state controlled via the time saving loss or the jackpot. With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when a big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the super reach will be missed. Since the ratio of becoming is low, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (F), in this example, if the relief time is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 3 or less. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of being determined to fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortening fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting higher. Further, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (G), in this example, if the time is out of the range within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the number of reserved storages (for example, the total number of reserved storages) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of being determined to the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting higher.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-8 (F) and 36-8 (G), if the deviation is within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 It is not determined to be (Super Reach β), and Super Reach is not executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the variable display of the super reach is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened but the jackpot is not obtained. In addition, even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the rate is lower than the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time (that is, the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in FIG. 36-7 (C)). At the time of disconnection, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (H), in this example, when the deviation occurs in the probabilistic state, the fluctuation patterns include the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). ), The fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 36-8 (H), in this example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90% in the probabilistic state, and the average fluctuation time is further averaged than in the time-shortened state. Is getting shorter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (I), in this example, the variation display is such that the relief time is shortened, and if it is out of alignment, the variation pattern is determined to be the variation pattern PA3-1 (rushing out). NS. That is, the variation pattern PA3-1 (rushing off) is a variation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction, which is not used for the variation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but is used only for the variation display (disappearance) that results in the relief time reduction. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (rushing off), as will be described later, a time saving rushing effect (for example, a time saving rushing effect) for notifying that the fluctuation pattern is controlled to the time saving state (that is, the relief time saving) is performed. (See FIGS. 36-38 (G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to be shortened, and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (J), in this example, if the relief time is shortened and the jackpot is missed, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing pretending jackpot) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Will be done. That is, the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing fake jackpot) is a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the relief time reduction, which is not used for the fluctuation display that does not result in the relief time reduction, but is used only for the fluctuation display (big hit) that results in the relief time reduction. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (rushing pretending big hit) is determined, the time saving rushing effect (for example, FIG. 36) is notified that the time saving state (that is, the relief time saving) is controlled, as will be described later. -38 (G), (H)) and the same mode of effect (see, for example, FIG. 36-41 (G')), and then an effect of notifying that a big hit will occur (for example, FIG. 36-41). (See (H')) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time has been shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

The method of setting the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 36-7 and 36-8 is an example, and various modes can be considered. For example, when the time reduction state occurs during the time reduction state and the time reduction state is controlled again, it is the same as the variation pattern table C for the time reduction state controlled via the jackpot shown in FIG. 36-7 (C). The table may be used to determine the variation pattern.

Further, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next big hit among the cases where the time saving is lost (in this example, the time saving state is A during the time saving state), via the big hit shown in FIG. 36-7 (C). The fluctuation pattern may be determined by using the same table as the fluctuation pattern table C for the deviation in the time saving state controlled by.

Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 36-8 (E), the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 of the extremely shortened fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is high during the time saving state via the relief time saving, and the fluctuation display is displayed. Since the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of feasible advance notice effects and look-ahead advance notice effects. For example, when the time is shortened via the relief time saving, the effect image is displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect of turning on the lamp or the LED, the predetermined effect sound, or the normal effect. An effect that outputs different fluctuating stop sounds is executed.

Further, in this example, the case where the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is provided, but the fluctuation pattern table E dedicated to the time saving state via the relief time saving is not provided, for example, via the jackpot. The fluctuation pattern may be determined by using the fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 36-7 (C)) in the time saving state.

Further, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case of switching to the fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see FIGS. 36-8 (F) and (G)) is shown. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, or the number of divisions such as 100 or 200 remaining fluctuations. Only in the case of, the fluctuation pattern table may be switched so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested.

Further, in this example, different fluctuation pattern tables are used (that is, the average fluctuation time is different) depending on the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the missed time saving, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in both cases (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same), and the time saving state via the relief time saving is better than the time saving state via the jackpot or the missed time saving. However, the average fluctuation time may be long.

(Direction control command)
36-9 and 36-10 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 36-9 and 36-10, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command for designating a variation pattern of the decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. (Fluctuating pattern command). The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when any of the commands 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (missing designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is out of line (no time reduction). be.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command) (time saving A designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation A. be. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command) (time saving B designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time saving deviation B. be. Command 9003 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command) (time reduction C designation command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is the time reduction C. be.

The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command is a normal jackpot. The command 9005 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variation jackpot designation command)) for designating the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol designated by the variation pattern command as the probability variation jackpot. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (sudden probability change jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly changed to the probability change jackpot. ..

The command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, the value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (the number of times of 126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, the command 9501 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, the command is transmitted. The command 957E (H) is transmitted as a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. In this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 times or more, the maximum value of 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and the command is uniformly designated as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. The command 957F (H) is transmitted to.

The command 96XX (H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) for designating the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 2 designated command. For example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, the command 9601 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief times 2, and when the remaining number of fluctuations is 800, the command is transmitted. The command 9608 (H) is transmitted as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

The command 97XX (H) is an effect control command (command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration) that specifies the number of remaining fluctuations (the number of times in units of 100 times) until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration is set with a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the time for relief is shortened and transmitted. For example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened at the time of power restoration is 100 times or less, the command 9701 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of relief time reductions at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 times or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, the command 9708 (H) is transmitted as a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for restoration.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be specified in units of 126 times, and when the remaining number of times is 127 times or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, two commands may be combined and transmitted so that even if the remaining number of times is 127 or more, the two commands can be identifiable and transmitted in units of one time.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command A100 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. The command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. The command A102 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for designating the start of the jackpot game. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the end of the jackpot game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during opening of the big winning opening) for designating the display during the round during the big hit game. The number of rounds to be displayed in "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening the big winning opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the big hit game.

The command B400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize in the prize opening) for designating that the game ball has won a prize in the prize opening.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by one. The command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. The command E001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game. The command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is lost. The command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time reduction state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time reduction state at the time of relief time reduction. The command E004 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state specification command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the probability change state.

The command E100 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification start designation command) for designating the start of right-handed notification. The command E101 (H) is an effect control command (right-handed notification end designation command) for designating the end of the right-handed notification.

The command F000 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that specifies to start displaying the customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the hold storage is not stored (that is, when the total number of hold storages is 0) at the end of the symbol confirmation period and the end of the jackpot game. The customer waiting demo designation command is also transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (it is transmitted regardless of whether the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). In addition, for example, when shifting to the setting change mode for executing the setting change process or the setting confirmation mode for executing the setting confirmation process, a setting value specification command is sent after each mode is completed, and then a customer waiting demo is specified. The command is sent. When the recovery process or the setting confirmation process is executed, the customer is not executing the big hit game, the small hit game, or the special figure game, and the hold memory is not stored. The wait demo specification command is sent. As will be described later, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, the relief time saving function is activated when 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of starting winning. Start the telop display indicating that it is installed (in this example, it is determined whether or not to display the telop by lottery). In addition, when 3 minutes have passed without receiving another command after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the demonstration movie is played.

The command F1XX (H) is an effect control command (setting value designation command) for designating a set setting value. A value corresponding to the set value is set in "XX".

When the effect control CPU 120 (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) mounted on the effect control board 12 receives the above-mentioned effect control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11. The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 36-9 and 36-10, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice control board 13. The effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 36-9 and 36-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to the jackpot game and an effect control command indicating the game state (for example, an effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 36-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main process in the feature unit 108IW. In this example, the processes of steps S1 to S7, the processes of steps S8 to S9, and the processes of steps S10 to S12 are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 31.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing the recovery from the power failure is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. Control is performed so that a value corresponding to the value of the current relief time reduction counter is set and a recovery relief time reduction specification command is transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9701 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the value of the current relief time reduction counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 controls to transmit the command 9708 (H) as a recovery time reduction designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed and the recovery process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted, and the remaining time until the current relief time is shortened. The number of fluctuations is notified. In addition, the relief time can be shortened by executing the variable display based on the hold memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the hold memory stored before the power failure). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player when a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold memory corresponding to the variable display in which the relief time is shortened is stored before the power failure.

In this example, a case is shown in which a command for specifying the number of times of relief time for recovery is transmitted separately from the command for recovery at the time of power failure recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, the power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 may be configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened and transmitted.

Further, when the effect control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100 IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. That is, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and then the jackpot and the time reduction are not generated even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times, the relief time is shortened and the time reduction state is established. Will be controlled by. In this example, the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter can be specified based on the effect control command for instructing the initialization to be transmitted in step S9.

In this example, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter to make the initial setting, but only in such a mode. Instead, it may be configured not to perform the initial setting of the relief time reduction counter when the RAM clear processing is executed. For example, when the RAM clear process is executed, the time saving flags A to C indicating that the time saving state is executed, the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time saving state, and the hold storage are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the state where the value of the relief time reduction counter on the previous day is continued, so that the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced and the player is not disadvantaged. be able to. In addition, it is possible to prevent the relief time reduction counter from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, in the case of the above configuration, the relief time reduction counter is not initially set only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear processing is executed, and the RAM is configured. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is executed, the relief time reduction counter may be initially set.

(Special design normal processing)
36-12 and 36-13 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S110) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number is confirmed. If the total number of reserved storages is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second number of reserved storages is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second hold storage number counter for counting the second hold storage number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Set the data indicating "second" in (step 100IWS53). If the second reserved storage number is 0 (that is, when only the first reserved storage number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In the feature unit 108IW, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS52 to S54, the variation display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variation display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in preference to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol are executed in the order in which the game ball wins the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = 1 in the first hold storage number buffer. The numerical value is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage number buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage counter, and each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift the contents of. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 has a storage area corresponding to the first hold storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first hold storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always extracted is the first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved memory) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the hit determination random number from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads a hit determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs a big hit determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3) with a hit determination random number, and executes a process of determining a jackpot if they match. It is a program. That is, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, the CPU 103 has a jackpot determination value for low probability (FIGS. 36-2 (A) and 36-3) unless a probability variation flag indicating that the probability variation state is set (if the probability variation state is low). (See (A)) is used to make a jackpot determination. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (in the high probability state), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot determination value for high probability (see FIGS. 36-2 (B) and 36-3 (B)). Make a big hit judgment. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 36-2 and 36-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

When it is decided to make a big hit (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot) corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 100IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not decided to make a big hit (N in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display in the time reduction state is 0. (Step 100 IWS66). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the time reduction counter value (step 100IWS67), and confirms whether or not the subtracted time reduction counter value is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction end flag indicating that the time reduction state ends at the end of the fluctuation (step 100IWS69).

In this example, steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed before the count processing of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 100IWS70 to perform the subtraction processing of the time reduction counter. I can't be limited. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the time reduction counter after executing the counting process of the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction after step 100 IWS70. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that shortens the relief time, if the subtraction process is executed after setting "800" in the time reduction counter (see step 100IWS172), the value of the time reduction counter becomes 1 extra. Since the value is subtracted, the value of the time reduction counter may be added by 1 again after the subtraction process in the variable display in which the relief time is shortened. Further, it may be configured to set "901", which is one more time reduction counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the relief time reduction counter value (step 100IWS71). In this example, by executing the process of step 100 IWS71, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the game state is the normal state, the time reduction state, or the probability change state. .. Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the variation display of the first special symbol is executed or the variation display of the second special symbol is executed. , The value of the relief time reduction counter is updated uniformly.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 sets the value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and issues the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Control to transmit to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9501 (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 126, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 957E (H) as the relief time reduction 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of the relief time reduction (step 100IWS75). .. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data, and commands 957F as a relief time reduction 1 designation command. (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100 IWS76). Next, in the CPU 103, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is the number of times in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is confirmed whether or not it is (step 100IWS77). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction is in units of 100 times, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction counter in the EXT data, and directs and controls the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Control to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 100, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9601 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 800, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the command 9608 (H) as the relief time reduction 2 designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS79.

In this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, CPU 103) counts the number of remaining fluctuations up to the relief time reduction and transmits the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and execute the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect described later.

Further, for example, as will be described later, the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the relief time is shortened, and in a configuration in which the relief time reduction can be continuously generated, the relief time reduction is set to the first time. It is configured to send the relief time reduction number 1 specified command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command only when the relief time is reduced, and when the relief time is reduced after the second time, the relief time reduction number 1 specified command and the relief time reduction number 2 specified command are transmitted. It may be configured not to.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is via the relief time saving), the process proceeds to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS79 is executed and the time is shortened via the relief time reduction, the time reduction is not determined as it is without performing the subsequent time reduction determination processing of step 100IWS81. It is decided to.

In addition to the time saving state via the relief time saving, the time saving state may be uniformly determined not to be determined as the time saving state during the time saving state including the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. That is, not only when the time saving flag C is set, but also when the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B are set, the time saving deviation determination process after step 100 IWS81 is uniformly prevented, and there is no time saving as it is. You may decide to make it out of the question.

Further, conversely, even during the time saving state via the relief time saving, the processing after step 100IWS81 may be executed so that the time saving deviation can be determined. Further, the same variation display may be configured so that both the relief time reduction and the time reduction deviation may occur. In this case, for example, it may be configured to give priority to the relief time saving and control it to the time saving state, or it may be configured to control the time saving time loss to give priority to the time saving state.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, the time saving state via the relief time saving is not set), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the probability change flag is set (that is, if it is in the probability change state), the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84. In this example, by executing the process of step 100 IWS80, it is determined that, in the case of the probability change state, the process of step 100 IWS 81 and the subsequent process of determining the time reduction is not performed, and the process of step 100 IWS 81 is performed as it is. NS.

If the probability change flag is not set (that is, if it is not in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses a time reduction loss determination table for determining whether or not the time reduction is lost, and a lottery process based on the time reduction deviation determination random number is used. To determine whether or not the time reduction is lost (step 100IWS81). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time saving loss determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/400. (See FIG. 36-2). If the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving loss determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving is lost with a probability of about 1/200 (). See Figure 36-3).

When it is decided to be out of time (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 uses the type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number for type determination stored in the random number buffer area (out of time A or out of time). B, time saving loss C) is determined as the type of time saving loss (step 100IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random numbers extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS84.

In step 100IWS83, the time saving type determination is performed using the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65 and the common type determination random number. Furthermore, when the small hit type is also determined and the small hit type is also determined, a common type determination random number is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the large hit type determination and the time saving type determination. It may be configured to perform the determination process.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make a normal jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probabilistic jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided and suddenly it is decided to make a probabilistic jackpot, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be the time saving out of A, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "2". If it is decided and it is decided to set the time saving out of B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4", and if it is decided to be the time saving out of C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set to "6". If it is decided and it is decided that it is out of order (no time reduction), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined as "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined stop symbol of the special symbol in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 36-14 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time is shortened and the value is a big hit), the CPU 103 uses FIG. 36-8 (J) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) Is selected (step 100 IWS1701B). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 36-7 (A) as the table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 100IWS1702). ..

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, the variation display that shortens the relief time and the relief time is out of order), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the variation pattern in FIG. 36-8 (I). ) Is selected (step 100 IWS1702B). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the relief time reduction counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10 or less), the CPU 103 has a total hold storage counter value of 3 or less. Check if it is. In addition, not limited to the aspect shown in this example, for example, it may be configured to confirm whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter or the second hold storage number counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending storage counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the deviation immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 36-8 (F). The variation pattern table F of (step 100IWS1705) is selected. If the value of the total pending storage counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 serves as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern for the deviation immediately before the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 36-8 (G). The variation pattern table G of (step 100IWS1706) is selected.

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the probability change state shown in FIG. 36-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select H (step 100 IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table H on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 36-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table C for the outlier in the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table C on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation as shown in FIG. 36-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table D for the outlier in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table D on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 36-8 (E). The variation pattern table E for the outlier in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100 IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 is stored in the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, S1715, and the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 36-7 and 36-8 is used (step 100IWS1716). In this example, by determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined. After determining the fluctuation time, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Special symbol variation processing)
FIG. 36-15 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first determines whether or not to make a big hit, the big hit type determination result, and the time saving type if it has not been transmitted yet. Based on the determination result of, one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) is controlled to be transmitted to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is determined to be out of time (step). 100IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85.

If it is determined that the time is out of time, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 measures the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the time saving state), the CPU 103 determines the symbol confirmation period for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

Unless it is determined to be out of time (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1133, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started to light at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" in the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, when the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

If the relief time reduction determination flag is not set (N in step 100IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol to "0.5". A value corresponding to "seconds" is set (step 100 IWS1137). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command capable of specifying that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). .. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to send the second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
36-16 and 36-17 are flowcharts showing a special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 100IWS131), and confirms whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). ..

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not ended), the special symbol stop process is terminated. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (that is, if the confirmation display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has ended), the jackpot flag is set in the CPU 103. It is confirmed whether or not it has been performed (step 100IWS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103, if set, counts the probability change flag, the time reduction flag A, the time reduction flag B, the time reduction flag C, and the number of times of execution of the variation display during the probability change state. The probability variation counter and the time reduction counter for counting the number of executions of the variation display during the time reduction state are reset (step 100IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the big hit, and even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed after the big hit game is completed, neither the next big hit nor the time reduction occurs. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

In this example, when a big hit is obtained by executing the process of step 100 IWS135, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter at the start of the fanfare period of the big hit to make an initial setting. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter during the round of the jackpot game, and "800" may be set in the relief time reduction counter at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot game to make the initial setting. It may be configured as.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the jackpot start designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a large winning opening pre-opening time timer for measuring the large winning opening pre-opening time (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 100IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S144) (step 100 IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time saving number counter (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when the relief time is shortened, the time reduction state is controlled to 800 times (see steps 100IWS172 and S173). By executing the processes of steps 100 IWS143 and S144, in this example, when the time reduction state is controlled with the relief time reduction as an opportunity, after that, the variation display is executed 800 times without a big hit or a time reduction loss. With this as an opportunity, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. After that, if the next big hit or time reduction does not occur even after executing the fluctuation display 800 times, the second relief time is shortened and the time reduction state is controlled. In this example, the time reduction does not occur in the time reduction state triggered by the relief time reduction, but it may occur and the value of the relief time reduction counter is reset (that is, "800" is set). ) May be done.

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the probability variation counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the probability variation counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variation counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation counter (step 100IWS147) and confirms whether or not the value of the probability variation counter after subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability change counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability change flag and the time saving flag A, and ends the probability change state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the right-handed notification end designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the normal state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS153.

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS141 to S152, the time saving final variation and the probability variation final variation shift to the normal state at the end of the symbol determination period and end the right-handed notification. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the time saving final fluctuation or the probability variation final fluctuation, the right-handed notification may be terminated by shifting to the normal state at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol fixing period.

Further, in this example, the case where the probabilistic state is terminated and the time saving state is also terminated in the probabilistic final variation is shown, but not limited to such a mode, only the probabilistic state is terminated and the time saving state is continued. It may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it is the case where the time reduction is decided (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is determined that the time reduction is out of time can be determined, for example, by confirming the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85.

If it is determined that the time reduction is off, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time reduction flag A or the time reduction flag B is set (step 100IWS154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time saving number counter if it is out of time saving A (Y in step 100IWS155). (Step 100 IWS156). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "50" in the time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 100IWS157) (step 100IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction B (that is, if it is the time reduction C), the CPU 103 sets "30" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS159). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, in the time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 if the time saving is out of A (Y in step 100 IWS160). Step 100 IWS 161). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction A, the CPU 103 sets "200" in the time reduction counter if it is the time reduction B (Y in step 100IWS162) (step 100IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

If it is not the time reduction B (that is, if it is the time reduction C), the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS164). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, when "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter triggered by the time reduction, and even if the fluctuation display of 800 times is executed after the time reduction is executed, neither the next big hit nor the time reduction occurs. , The relief time will be shortened and the time will be controlled.

Next, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state B designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

By executing the processing of steps 100IWS166 and S168, in this example, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time saving state B designation command is issued. By being transmitted, the background image can be switched according to the time saving state via the time saving deviation.

Unless it is determined to be out of time (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the relief time reduction determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction counter to "800". Is set (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In this example, the relief time can be continuously generated by controlling the time reduction state at the timing when the relief time is shortened and setting the relief time reduction counter ("800" is set). Once the time reduction occurs, it is configured to continue the time reduction state until a big hit occurs, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, at the timing when the relief time is shortened, the relief time reduction counter is not set only by controlling the time reduction state, and then the relief time reduction counter is set at the timing when the fluctuation display of 800 times is finished and the normal state is controlled. (See step 100 IWS 144).

Further, in this example, "800" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is "0". However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, "0" is set when setting the relief time reduction counter, and the value of the relief time reduction counter is added by 1 each time the fluctuation display is executed, and the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "800". Based on this, it may be configured to generate a reduction in relief time.

Further, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, a case is shown in which 20 seconds longer than usual is set as the symbol confirmation period to secure an effect period such as a mode transition effect, but the image display device is used during the symbol determination period. In 5, the decorative symbol may not be displayed, but only the small symbol may be displayed so that the small symbol is not concealed by the effecting object or the like.

Further, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS172, 800 times, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction occurs, is set as the time reduction number, but it is limited to such a mode. No. For example, in step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" may be set in the time reduction counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to a plurality of types of time reduction times may be set in the time reduction counter. For example, when the relief time is shortened for the first time, "100" is set in the time reduction counter, and when the relief time is shortened for the second time, "800" is set in the time reduction counter. May be good.

Further, for example, a lottery process based on a random number may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined in the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10% and 800 times with a probability of 90%. When determining the number of time reductions by lottery processing, the number of time reductions may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and the time reduction type, or the number of time reductions may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIG. 36-18 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output externally from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIG. 36-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Of these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and the time saving state. Further, the jackpot 3 signals are signals that are output externally during the symbol determination period that is out of time. Further, the jackpot 4 signals are signals that are output externally during the symbol determination period of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol determination period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the game is shifted to the time saving state at the end of the big hit game, the time saving out-of-time symbol may be derived and displayed even when the time-saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, the external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started. In addition, even if the relief time is shortened, the time may be shortened. Therefore, if a symbol that is out of the variable display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed, the jackpot 2 signal is displayed at the end of the symbol confirmation period. External output is started.

The big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol determination period but also during the big hit game. Further, in this example, a case where different external output signals (3 big hit signals and 4 big hit signals) are output for the case where the time reduction is missed and the case where the relief time is shortened is shown, but the external output signal for both purposes is shown. May be configured to output.

Further, the big hit 3 signal and the big hit 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal during the symbol determination period is output.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the missing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. The fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after the fluctuation stop signal is output. With such a configuration, when the fluctuation stop signal and the big hit 3 signal or the big hit 4 signal are output at the same time, it is possible to prevent the signal from being dropped externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signals may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the time saving deviation. Further, the jackpot 4 signals may be configured to be continuously output even during the time saving state via the relief time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably discriminate the type of the time saving even in the time saving state.

(Big hit end processing)
FIG. 36-19 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and controls the transmission of the jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time (big hit end display time) in which the big hit end display is performed in the image display device 5 in the big hit end display timer (step 100IWS534), and performs the process. finish.

In step 100 IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). Whether or not it is a normal big hit can be determined by checking, for example, the stop symbol of the special symbol stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100 IWS85. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state A designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag and controls the probability variation state (step 100IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 sets "100" in the probability variation counter (step 100IWS542). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the probability change state designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state change)
Next, the state transition in the feature unit 108IW will be described. FIG. 36-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature unit 108IW. As shown in FIG. 36-20, in the normal state, when a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot occurs, the probability variation state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A (see steps 100IWS541 to S542). It is controlled to (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the normal state, even if the symbol is out of time, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving deviation) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 100IWS166). Furthermore, even if the time is lost, the number of fluctuations has reached 800 times without the next big hit or time saving loss occurring after the RAM clear processing or after the big hit or time saving loss. In the case), it is controlled to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) (see step 100IWS173).

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the probability change state, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled again (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time is shortened. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probabilistic state, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS80), and the relief time is not shortened. Further, in the probabilistic state, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the time saving state A, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs again. It is controlled to the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state A, even if it is out of time, it is controlled to the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out) when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed (see step 100IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, when the fluctuation display of 100 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, in the time saving state A, the relief time may not be shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the time saving state B, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time reduction occurs. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). Further, in the time saving state B, even if the time saving state B is out of order, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving out of time) is controlled again (see step 100IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, when the variation display of 30, 50, 100, or 200 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, it is controlled to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). However, if the time reduction state is controlled to the time reduction state B due to the time reduction loss A during the time reduction state, the time reduction state B is continued until the next big hit occurs (see steps 100IWS160 and S161). On the other hand, there is no case where the relief time is shortened in the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-20, in the time saving state C, when the probability change big hit or the sudden probability change big hit occurs, the probability change state is controlled (see steps 100IWS541 to S542), and when the normal big hit occurs, the time reduction occurs. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). Further, in the time saving state C, when the variation display of 800 times is completed without the occurrence of a big hit, the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) is controlled again (see steps 100IWS170 to S173).

In this example, when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed in the time saving state A, the case is uniformly shifted to the time saving state B, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is compared with the number of time reductions corresponding to the determined time reduction type, and if the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger, the current time reduction state A is configured to continue as it is. You may.

In this example, when a normal jackpot occurs during the time saving state B, the case where the time saving state A is uniformly shifted is shown, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is compared with the number of time reductions corresponding to the normal jackpot (100 times in this example), and if the remaining number of times of the current time reduction is larger, the current time reduction state B is continued as it is. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the time saving out-of-time symbol is not derived and displayed in the time saving state C (see Y in step 100IWS79), but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, for example. , Even in the time saving state C, it may be configured so that it can be determined that the time saving is out.

Further, in this example, when the probability change state is controlled, the case where the probability change state is terminated based on the execution of the fluctuation display 100 times is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to determine whether or not to end the probabilistic state for each variation display by a lottery process, and to end the probabilistic state based on the determination to end the probabilistic state.

(Main processing of production control)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 36-21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the effect control main process in the feature unit 108IW. In FIG. 36-21, the processes of steps S71 to S76 are the same as those processes shown in FIG. 34.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process of step 087IWS701, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. In the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols in a reduced manner of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process of step 100IWS702, the image display device 5 synchronizes with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in addition to the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed by the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. When the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process of step S77 is the same as the process of step S77 shown in FIG. 34.

When the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed, the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed by alternately turning on and off the two LEDs arranged above and below on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a and 21b. Will be done.

When the fluctuation time is completed, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is confirmed and displayed at the start of the symbol determination period. In this case, in the case of a big hit, the two LEDs arranged one above the other as the big hit symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in red. In addition, when the time reduction is lost, the two LEDs arranged above and below as the time reduction deviation symbol are stopped and displayed in a state of being lit in blue. In addition, when the LED is off (no time reduction), the two LEDs arranged above and below are turned off as an out-of-order design (no time reduction), and the stop display is displayed.

The mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, and for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is derived and displayed in a mode in which the jackpot type and the time saving type can be distinguished. May be good.

Further, in this example, the case where a dedicated symbol is provided as the time-saving out-of-time symbol of the fourth symbol is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode, and the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is provided in the case of a big hit and the case of time-saving out of time. May be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. 36-22 to 36-23 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The effect control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception count counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step 100IWS617), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618). ).

The received effect control command is one of the symbol confirmation command (1st symbol confirmation A designation command, 1st symbol confirmation B designation command, 1st symbol confirmation C designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation A designation command, 2nd symbol confirmation If it is (B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the effect control CPU 120 sets the confirmation command reception flag corresponding to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the first confirmation C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received, the second confirmation C command reception flag is set.

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received effect control command is a rescue time reduction 1 designation command (step 100IWS625), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received relief time reduction 1 designation command to the relief time reduction 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Store in (step 100 IWS 626).

If the received effect control command is a rescue time reduction 2 designation command (step 100IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 transmits the received relief time reduction 2 designation command to the relief time reduction 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. Store in (step 100 IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a recovery time reduction time reduction command (step 100IWS629), the effect control CPU 120 reaches the relief time reduction in the image display device 5 based on the received recovery time reduction number designation command. Control is performed to display the initial result according to the number of times (step 100IWS630). For example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "01 (H)" (when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 100 or less), the initial result is "112". Is displayed, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 or less. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "02 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less), the initial stage. "223" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 101 times or more and 200 times or less. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial state "889" is displayed as a result, suggesting that the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less.

It should be noted that not only when the initial result suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations is displayed at the time of power restoration, for example, in the first variation display after power restoration, a display suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed. , A combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations may be displayed. Further, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after the power restoration, a display suggesting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, a combination of symbols suggesting the remaining fluctuations, and the like are displayed after the power restoration. The suggestion display may be configured at a relatively early stage. Further, it may be configured so as not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened by the initial roll (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the relief time is shortened by the initial roll). It is possible not to suggest the number of remaining fluctuations).

If the received effect control command is a normal state specification command (step 100IWS631), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the normal state (for example, a blue background image according to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS632).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state A designation command (step 100IWS633), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a setting sun) corresponding to the time saving state A (time saving state via a jackpot). Control to switch to the yellow background image according to the mode) is performed (step 100IWS634).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 100IWS635), the effect control CPU 120 presents the image display device 5 with a background image (for example, a time saving state via the time saving state) according to the time saving state B. Control to switch to the green background image according to the forest mode) is performed (step 100IWS636).

If the received effect control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100IWS637), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, a time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to the orange background image according to the tangerine field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processes of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even in the same time saving state, which of the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving is performed. Display different background images depending on. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Not limited to the mode shown in this example, the common background image is displayed regardless of whether the time saving state is via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be configured. For example, a common background image may be displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image may be displayed in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, and the time saving state via the relief time saving. It may be configured as.

If the received effect control command is a probability change state specification command (step 100IWS639), the effect control CPU 120 displays a background image according to the probability change state (for example, a red background image according to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS 640).

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the effect control CPU 120 controls to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In this example, the right-handed notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when the time saving out-of-time symbol is derived and displayed or the relief time is shortened (see step 100IWS1126, S1134). At the start of the symbol determination period, the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 is turned on.

If the received effect control command is a right-handed notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the effect control CPU 120 controls to end the lighting of the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a process of storing the received effect control command or setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 100 IWS645). ). For example, when a command for designating a large prize opening is received, a large winning opening winning flag indicating that the large winning opening has been won is set. Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS611.

(Customer waiting demo production control process)
FIG. 36-24 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo effect control process. As described above, in this example, when the hold storage is not stored at the end of the symbol determination period and the end of the jackpot game (that is, when the total number of hold storages is 0), the effect control board from the main board 11 A customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted to 12.

When the customer waiting demo designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demo designation command, and then 10 seconds elapse without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning. (Y in step 105IWS250), the telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105IWS251).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop indicating that the relief time saving function is installed during the period when the variable display is not performed. In step 105 IWS251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display the telop.

FIG. 36-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the telop display execution lottery table and the telop mode determination lottery table. Of FIGS. 36-25, FIG. 36-25 (A) is a telop display execution lottery table used when the set value is set to "1", and FIG. 36-25 (B) shows the set value is set. It is a telop display execution lottery table used when it is set to "6".

As shown in FIGS. 36-25 (A) and 36-25 (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying the telop while waiting for a customer differs depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened depending on the presence or absence of the telop display while waiting for the customer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-25 (A) and 36-25 (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying the telop while waiting for a customer differs depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it can be suggested whether the set value is set to be advantageous depending on the presence or absence of the telop display while waiting for the customer.

In addition, in FIG. 36-25, an example of the set value 1 and the set value 6 is shown for simplification of the description, but a table corresponding to each set value may be provided, or a plurality of sets may be provided. A table corresponding to the set value of (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is determined to execute the telop display (Y in step 105IWS252), the effect control CPU 120 executes the telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, the telop display is started (step 105IWS254).

In this example, the telop display can be performed by the red effect mode and the blue effect mode. In step 105 IWS253, the effect mode of the telop display is determined by lottery.

FIG. 36-25 (C) is a telop mode determination lottery table used when the set value is set to "1", and FIG. 36-25 (D) shows the set value set to "6". It is a telop mode determination lottery table used when there is.

As shown in FIGS. 36-25 (C) and 36-25 (D), in this example, the effect mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for a customer differs depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened depending on the effect mode of the telop display waiting for the customer.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-25 (C) and 36-25 (D), in this example, the ratio of the telop display effect mode displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to be different depending on the set value. With such a configuration, it can be suggested whether the set value is set to be advantageous depending on the effect mode of the telop display waiting for the customer.

Then, after 3 minutes have passed without receiving other commands such as the effect control command at the time of starting winning after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command (Y in step 105IWS255), the effect control CPU 120 is demonstrated. The movie is played back (step 105IWS256).

It should be noted that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie waiting for the customer are terminated when the production control command or the like at the time of the start winning is received.

FIG. 36-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the telop display. In the example shown in FIGS. 36-26, the screens change in the order of (A), (B), (C), or (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 36-26 (A), if the hold storage is not stored when the symbol determination period elapses, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command on the production control board 12 side, 10 seconds have passed without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, and the telop display while waiting for the customer is displayed. If it is decided to do so, the image display device 5 displays a telop display indicating that the relief time saving function is installed.

At this time, if it is determined to display the telop display according to the blue effect mode, the telop display 108IW001 with a blue edge is displayed (in the example of FIG. 36-26 (B), the edge is white. It is in the form of). Further, when it is determined to display the telop display according to the red effect mode, the telop display 108IW002 with a red edge is displayed (in the example of FIG. 36-26 (D), the edge is painted black. It is an aspect).

Then, after 3 minutes have passed without receiving other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command on the production control board 12, the demonstration is performed on the image display device 5. The movie is played. As shown in FIGS. 36-26 (C) and 36-26 (E), the telop display is continuously displayed even during the playback of the demonstration movie.

(Read-ahead notice setting process)
FIG. 36-27 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead notice setting process (step S161) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 35.

In this example, in the start winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process process, a process of detecting the occurrence of the start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. In addition, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern is executed based on the extracted random number value. Then, after storing the hold information and the hold storage number, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the occurrence of the start winning prize, the hold storage number, and the look-ahead determination is set on the effect control board 12. Will be done. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 32 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

In the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161), for example, a determination, determination, and setting for executing the look-ahead notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is transmitted from the main board 11.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 36-27, the effect control CPU 120 is used to specify an effect control command at the time of starting a prize (for example, an effect control command for designating a determination result such as the occurrence of a start winning, the number of reserved memories, and the look-ahead determination). ) Is received (step 108IWS701).

When the effect control command at the time of starting prize is received, the effect control CPU 120 has a hold memory number including the hold memory for newly receiving the effect control command at the time of starting prize, which is larger than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. It is determined whether or not there are many (step 108IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored hold memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the relief time is shortened. Then, when the number of reserved memories is not greater than the number of remaining times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reserved memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed after the rescue time is shortened. Ends the read-ahead notice setting process.

In this example, by executing the process of step 108IWS702, among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved storage stored before the relief time is shortened, the look-ahead notice effect for which the variable display when the relief time is shortened is targeted for advance notice is performed. While it is feasible, it restricts the execution of the look-ahead notice effect that targets the variable display after the variable display when the relief time is shortened. That is, it is configured to limit the execution of the look-ahead notice effect across the relief time reduction in which the game state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

When the number of reserved memories is larger than the number of remaining times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, when the variable display corresponding to the newly stored reserved memory due to the occurrence of the start winning is executed before the rescue time is shortened. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the look-ahead notice effect is executed, the effect type when the pre-reading notice effect is executed, and the effect mode (step 108IWS703).

FIG. 36-28 is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the pre-reading advance notice effect execution decision table, the pre-read notice effect type determination table, and the pre-read notice effect mode determination table. In step 108 IWS703, each table shown in FIGS. 36-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect, the type of effect to be executed, and the mode of effect.

Specifically, when the gaming state is different from the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect using the look-ahead notice effect execution decision table shown in FIG. 36-28 (A). Then, when the gaming state is the time saving state C, the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined using the look-ahead notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-28 (B).

As shown in FIGS. 36-28 (A) and 36-28 (B), in this example, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit, and the big hit. In the case of, the rate of executing the look-ahead notice effect is higher than in the case of being out of order. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of becoming a big hit is high by executing the look-ahead notice effect.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 36-28 (A) and 36-28 (B), the display result is different in the time saving state C than in the gaming state other than the time saving state C. In addition, it is configured so that the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect is low. With such a configuration, in the case of the time saving state C (that is, when the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the pre-reading notice effect is executed but the big hit does not occur.

When the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined in step 108 IWS703, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the execution is executed using the look-ahead notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 36-28 (C). The effect type of the look-ahead notice effect to be performed is determined, and when the game state is the time saving state C, the effect of the look-ahead notice effect to be executed is performed using the look-ahead notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 36-28 (D). Determine the type. Specifically, the type of effect is determined to be either a chance eye effect or a pending change effect.

The chance eye effect is a variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect because the display result of the variable display that is executed before the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is the chance eye (“778” in this example). Is a production that suggests that is a big hit. In the chance eye effect, for example, an effect of inciting whether or not the display result is the chance eye (“778” in this example) is executed. Further, for example, when the chance eye effect is executed by the red effect mode, the red chance eye (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the chance eye effect is executed by the blue effect mode. The blue chance eye (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The hold change effect suggests that the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect becomes a big hit because the hold display corresponding to the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect is displayed in a display mode different from the normal mode. It is a production to do. Further, for example, when the hold change effect is executed by the red effect mode, the red hold display is displayed, and when the hold change effect is executed by the blue effect mode, the blue hold display is displayed. Will be done.

FIG. 36-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each effect type of the look-ahead notice effect. Of FIGS. 36-29, FIGS. 36-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of the chance eye effect, and FIGS. 36-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of the pending change effect. It shows an example.

When the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, it is shown in FIGS. 36-29 (B1) and (C1) after one variation display is started as shown in FIG. 36-29 (A1). As shown, the left and right decorative patterns are stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 36-29 (D1), whether the decorative symbol in the center stops at "7", which is the chance eye "778", or "6", which is not the chance eye "778". The production that incites is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 36-29 (E1), when the decorative symbol in the center stops at "7" and the chance eye "778" is stopped and displayed, the variable display becomes a big hit in the reserved memory. It will be suggested that there may be a corresponding hold memory. In addition, after the fanning effect is executed, a symbol different from the chance eye "778" (for example, "768") may be stopped and displayed.

When the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 36-29 (A2) and (B2), when the start winning is generated, the new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), and it is suggested that a variable display that is a big hit may be executed based on the hold storage corresponding to the hold display. In this example, the display mode of the hold display is inherited as the display mode of the active display. The hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in FIGS. 36-29, and at any timing from the display of the new hold display in the normal mode to the end of the corresponding hold display and active display display. It may be changed to a display mode different from the normal mode.

FIG. 36-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the relief. Of FIGS. 36-30, FIG. 36-30 (A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via the jackpot and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect, and FIG. 36-30 (B) is , It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the look-ahead notice effect. In the examples shown in FIGS. 36-30 (A) and 36-30 (B), it is assumed that the start winning prize is generated at the same timing.

As shown in FIG. 36-30 (A), when the chance eye effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, in the variable display executed from the time when the start winning prize is generated to the start of the variable display of the look-ahead target. , The effect of inciting whether or not the chance symbol is stopped is executed, and then the chance symbol is stopped and displayed. Since such a fanning effect is included, when executing the chance eye effect, it is necessary to secure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one variation display.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 36-30 (A), when the hold change effect is executed as the look-ahead notice effect, the change display of the look-ahead target is displayed from the timing when the start prize occurs or the time when the start prize occurs. The display mode of the hold display (or active display) changes at an arbitrary timing over a plurality of variable displays until the end. Then, the display of the hold display and the display of the active display according to the display mode after the change is continuously executed until the variable display of the look-ahead target is completed. That is, when the hold change effect is executed, it can be executed at any timing from the time when the start winning is generated until the variation display of the look-ahead target ends, and continues until the variation display of the look-ahead target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead advance notice effect, the execution period differs between the chance eye effect and the hold change effect. That is, the chance eye effect is executed in a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during one variation display, while the hold change effect is executed over a plurality of variation displays.

Further, as described above, in the time saving state via the jackpot, the ultra-super shortening fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is not executed at the time of disconnection, and the shortening fluctuation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but the time saving state via relief is executed. In, the extremely ultra-shortening fluctuation (1.5 seconds) is mainly executed at the time of disconnection. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 36-30, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance eye effect in the time saving state via the relief.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 36-28 (C) and 36-28 (D), both the chance eye effect and the hold change effect can be executed as the look-ahead notice effect in the time saving state via the big hit. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, as a look-ahead notice effect, the execution of the chance eye effect is restricted, and only the hold change effect can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute the look-ahead notice effect according to the game state.

Further, when the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is determined in step 108IWS703, if the game state is different from the time saving state C, the look-ahead notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-28 (E) is used. , The effect mode of the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is determined, and when the game state is the time saving state C, the look-ahead advance notice effect to be executed is executed using the look-ahead advance notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 36-28 (D). Determine the production type of. Specifically, it is determined to be either a red effect mode or a blue effect mode.

As shown in FIGS. 36-28 (E) and 36-28 (F), in this example, the pre-reading advance notice effect can be executed by the red effect mode and the blue effect mode, and the case of a big hit is out of order. It is configured so that the ratio of executing the look-ahead notice effect is higher depending on the red effect mode than in the case of. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the pre-reading advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 36-28 (E) and 36-28 (F), in the time saving state C, the pre-reading advance notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode. With such a configuration, in the case of the time saving state C (that is, when the big hit has not occurred for a long period of time), the deterioration of the interest when the pre-reading notice effect is executed is suppressed by the blue effect mode in which the big hit expectation is low. be able to. In this example, in the time saving state C, the look-ahead notice effect is executed only in the red effect mode, but when the time is off, the look-ahead notice effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, although the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the red effect mode, the display result is configured so as not to occur frequently.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in FIG. 36-28, the look-ahead notice is given depending on whether the time saving state C (that is, no big hit has occurred for a long period of time) or the time saving state C. The execution ratio of the production, the production type, and the ratio of the production mode can be different, and the interest can be improved.

In this example, as will be described later, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less, the execution of the advance notice effect is restricted (even if only the advance notice effect with high expectation is not executed). Although it is configured to be good), the execution of the pre-reading notice effect may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the pre-reading notice effect is executed in the case of a loss. It may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the ratio, or may reduce (or not execute) the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect of the type with high expectation.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 36-28, for example, even in the time saving state C, when the variable display that is a big hit or the time saving is executed, the execution of the look-ahead notice effect is not restricted. May be good.

When the process of step 108IWS704 is completed, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the look-ahead advance notice effect based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is determined to execute the chance eye effect, the chance eye flag is set as the execution setting of the chance eye effect in step 108IWS704. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process described later, when the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye effect is executed by selecting the process table including the chance eye effect. The chance eye flag is reset when the variation display immediately before the variation display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, the hold change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning in step 108IWS704.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 36-31 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process (step S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 35. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100 IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the effect control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the decorative symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 120 has a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step 100IWS802. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 120 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In step 100IWS802, the effect control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. ..

In step 100 IWS802, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 has a decorative symbol in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols as the stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). When the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot", the effect control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols (probability variation jackpot symbol) in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols as stop symbols. do. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability change big hit", the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the decorative symbols of "135" (sudden probability change big hit symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "off", a combination of decorative patterns other than the above is determined. However, when accompanied by a reach effect, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Further, even if it is out of order, if it is "out of time saving", the combination of the decorative symbols of the out of place symbol including the special symbol (for example, the star symbol) is determined. It should be noted that the combination of decorative symbols of the out-of-order symbols including different special symbols (for example, heart-shaped symbols and rhombic symbols) may be determined according to the time saving type. Further, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set, the combination of the decorative symbols of the chance eye symbol (“778” in this example) is determined.

The effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and a numerical value are associated with each other to generate a stop symbol for the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the decorative symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols with the same symbol on the left, middle, and right) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, the stop symbol (combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same odd-numbered symbols) reminiscent of the probabilistic jackpot is called the probabilistic jackpot symbol. In addition, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same even-numbered symbols) reminiscent of a normal jackpot (non-probability variation jackpot) is called a non-probability variation jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

FIG. 36-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table. In step 108IWS802A, when the number of times remaining until the relief time reduction exceeds 10 times, the presence or absence of execution of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-32 (A), and the relief time reduction is performed. When the number of remaining times up to is 10 or less, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect is executed by using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-32 (B). Further, when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, if the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10, the effect form of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-32 (C). Then, when the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the mode of the notice effect is determined using the notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-32 (D).

As shown in FIGS. 36-32 (A) and 36-32 (B), in this example, the advance notice effect can be executed in both the case where the display result is a big hit and the case where the display result is a big hit. It is configured so that the rate of executing the advance notice effect is higher in the case of becoming than in the case of being out of order. Therefore, it is suggested that the high expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 36-32 (A) and 36-32 (B), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). In this case, the rate of executing the advance notice effect is lower than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10) when the display result is out of alignment. It is configured as follows. With such a configuration, the advance notice effect is given in a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less, and the countdown effect and the effect effect described later are executed). It is possible to suppress the decline in interest when the game is executed but it does not become a big hit.

Further, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less), the countdown effect and the effect effect described later are executed. At this time, the timer is used as a notice effect. By limiting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counters, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 36-32 (C) and 36-32 (D), in this example, a red effect mode (for example, a red effect image is displayed) and a blue effect mode (for example, a blue effect image are displayed). The notice effect can be executed by (displayed), and the rate of executing the notice effect according to the red effect mode is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of the loss. Therefore, it is suggested that the expectation of a big hit is high by executing the advance notice effect of the red effect mode.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 36-32 (C) and 36-32 (D), a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). If the display result is different from the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10), the advance notice effect is executed by the red effect mode. It is configured so that the ratio of doing so is low. With such a configuration, the interest when the notice effect is executed in the red effect mode in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is not a big hit. Can be suppressed.

In addition, when a plurality of types of notice effects having different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, a notice effect of a type with a high jackpot expectation (for example, when the jackpot expectation is classified into 5 stages, it is possible to execute the notice effect. Only the notice production of the type with the jackpot expectation of the 4th stage or higher) is restricted in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less). May be good.

Further, not limited to the example shown in FIGS. 36-32, for example, even if the number of remaining times until the relief time reduction is 10 or less, when a variable display that is a big hit or a time reduction is executed, the advance notice effect is executed. You may not limit it.

Further, as described above, in this example, in the case of the time saving state C, the execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect is restricted, but the execution of the advance notice effect is also restricted (for example, the execution rate is lowered). It may be set (or not executed). In this case, it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the execution rate of the advance notice effect in the case of a loss, or it may be configured to reduce (or not execute) the advance notice effect of a type with high expectation. The execution rate may be reduced (or not executed).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times. (Step 100 IWS803). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times is determined by, for example, the number of relief time reductions of 2. It can be determined by checking whether or not the specified command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times, the effect control CPU 120 is until the relief time is shortened. A process table containing the fanning effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations of is selected (step 100IWS804). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 2 specified command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is set to "100". Select the process table that contains the corresponding fanning effect. Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designated command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 800 times), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800 times". Select a process table that includes a fanning effect according to. Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the relief time is shortened. It is confirmed whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the result is 0 (step 108IWS805). Whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0 is determined by checking, for example, whether or not the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

When the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the display result is a big hit (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time reduction rush effect that notifies that the time reduction state is controlled by the relief time reduction (step 100IWS806B). With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the relief time is controlled to be controlled to the time reduction state by the time reduction rush effect, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

On the other hand, when the display result is a big hit, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving rush rush effect that notifies that the display result will be a big hit after executing an effect in the same mode as the time-saving rush effect ( Step 100 IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812. With such a configuration, once the player recognizes that the number of remaining fluctuations has become 0 until the relief time is shortened, it is notified that a big hit will occur, so that the player can be given a surprise. You can improve your interest.

In this example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the time reduction rushing pretending effect is executed using the special relief time reduction fluctuation big hit fluctuation pattern. For example, even if the full rotation effect (that is, the jackpot is confirmed) that fluctuates while the three decorative symbols are aligned is executed, which is not executed except when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached. good. With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, for example, when the display result becomes a big hit when the number of fluctuations of the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for big hits as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time is specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

Further, in this example, when the display result is out of order when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, a dedicated variation pattern for the relief time reduction deviation is used. A fluctuation pattern for deviation similar to the usual one may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used. With this configuration, the fluctuation pattern can be shared between when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached and before it is reached, and the data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the symbol determination period elapses, the time saving state C is entered, and the background image (in this example, the orange color) corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed on the image display device 5. Since the background image of the display color can be switched to (see step 078IWS638), it is possible to notify that the change in the background image controls the time saving state by the relief time saving.

When the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 times or less (). Step 108 IWS807). To check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be judged by doing.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. (Step 108 IWS808). For example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 specified command is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 10), the count number until the relief time is reduced " Select a process table that includes a countdown effect and an effect effect according to "10". Further, for example, when the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced is 1), the count until the relief time is reduced is counted. Select a process table that includes a countdown effect and an effect effect according to the number "1". Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

In this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the relief, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief change.

In this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and the fanning effect or the countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the background specification command for specifying the background image is configured to be transmitted, the EXT data of the background specification command is configured to be set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and transmitted. You may. Then, the effect control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command and execute the fanning effect or the countdown effect.

Further, in this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect are always executed, but whether or not to execute by lottery. You may decide whether or not. Further, for example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is not 10 times or less, the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect (for example, the countdown effect and the effect effect are executed in the same manner as the effect effect). , The countdown effect and the effect effect according to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but are interrupted in the middle. (See FIG. 36-42) is determined by lottery. May be good. In this case, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 times or less, the countdown effect and the effect effect (genuine and fake) are compared to when the number of fluctuations is not 10 times or less. Including) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to expect the player to change the relief, and it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief change.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 10 times or less (N in step 108IWS807), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set (step 108IWS809). , When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is set, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table including the chance eye effect (including the effect of inciting whether or not the chance eye effect is obtained) (step 108 IWS810). .. In addition, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect that the chance eye pattern is not stopped and displayed after executing the effect of inciting whether or not it becomes the chance eye (so-called chance eye effect of Gase) is executed by lottery. You may decide whether or not to do so.

When the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108 IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 120 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of the fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the decorative symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 12. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, the image display device 5 outputs a command to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Further, in order to output the voice from the speakers 8L and 8R, the control signal (phone number data) is output to the voice control board 13.

In the feature unit 108IW, the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, while the effect control CPU 120 controls the variation pattern command. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display during production processing)
36-33 and 36-34 are flowcharts showing the variable display during effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 35. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step 100IWS841) and 1 subtracts the variable time timer value (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step 100IWS845).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 performs a mode transition effect (an effect of notifying the transition to the time saving state (time saving mode)) and right-handed. The process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS849). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

In this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the time reduction may be delayed or the relief time may be shortened during the normal state. However, in step 100IWS847, when the time reduction is lost during the normal state, the process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for the time reduction deviation and the right-handed notification is selected, and when the relief time is shortened, the relief time is shortened. Select the process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. Whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received as the relief time is shortened is determined by, for example, the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command being "00 ( It can be determined by confirming whether or not it is "H)".

If neither the first symbol confirmation A designation command nor the second symbol confirmation A designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command. (Step 100 IWS851). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuation effect (the effect of notifying that the time saving state continues). (Step 100 IWS852). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS854). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, whether or not the effect control CPU 120 has received the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command. (Step 100 IWS 856). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the first confirmed C command reception flag or the second confirmed C command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y in step 100IWS856), or when the fluctuation time timer has timed out (Y in step 100IWS857), the effect control CPU 120 is normally used. Select the process table according to the symbol confirmation display of (step 100IWS858). Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). Further, the effect control CPU 120 serves as an effect device (image display device 5 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and speakers 8L, 8R as production parts) is executed (step 100IWS860). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds in the confirmation effect period timer for measuring the symbol determination period on the effect control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 100 IWS862.

In this example, in addition to the case where the symbol confirmation designation command is received, even when the fluctuation time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process shifts to the processing after step 100IWS858 and shifts to the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not missed, it is determined as Y in step 100IWS857 and the process does not shift to the processing after step 100IWS858.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (step S173) (step 100 IWS862).

(Waiting processing per special figure)
FIG. 36-35 is a flowchart showing a special figure hit waiting process (step S173) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 35. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the fixed effect period timer (step 100IWS871), and confirms whether or not the value of the fixed effect period timer after the subtraction has timed out (step 100IWS871). Step 100 IWS872). Final effect period after subtraction If the timer value has not timed out, the process timer value is subtracted by 1 (step 100IWS873), and the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data). Control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speakers 8L, 8R as the effect component) is executed according to n) (step 100IWS874).

Further, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the effect control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). Further, the effect control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table in the process timer and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS878). Stopping the decorative symbol If the symbol is being confirmed and displayed, the process ends as it is. If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is not being confirmed and displayed, the effect control CPU 120 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol (no time reduction), time saving deviation symbol, jackpot symbol) (step 100IWS879). ).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the effect control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the fixed effect period timer after subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol fixed period has elapsed), the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot stop flag is set (step). 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the effect control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received (step 100IWS883). Whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start specification command has not been received, the process ends as it is.

If the jackpot start designation command is received, the effect control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the big hit medium effect including the mode transition effect (the effect of notifying the transition to the probability change state (probability change mode) or the time reduction state (time reduction mode)) and the right-handed notification. (Step 100 IWS885). Then, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). The control of the effect device (image display device 5 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and the speaker 27 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 100 IWS887).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during the jackpot (step 100 IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, when the missed symbol (no time reduction) or the missed symbol is stopped and displayed), the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to the variable display start wait process. The value is updated according to (step S170) (step 100 IWS889).

(Direction execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be described. FIG. 36-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variable display that shortens the relief time is executed. As shown in FIGS. 36-36, in the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is finished, and the missing symbol (no time reduction). When is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the time reduction rush effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variation display of the special symbol. (See step 108 IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-design symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds (see step 100IWS1135). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIGS. 36-36, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the symbol determination period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 36-36 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when the symbol determination period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 36-36, in the image display device 5, the background image corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) (this example). Then, it can be switched to the orange display color background image) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the effect when switching the game state and to enjoy the hobby. Can be improved.

(Production example)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving, will be described. 36-37 to 36-40 are explanatory views for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the state shifts to the time saving state. In addition, in FIGS. 36-37 to 36-40, the effect screens transition in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 36-37 (A), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbol is stopped. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, it is assumed that the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are stopped and the detached symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "134") is derived and displayed when the remaining 800 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. At this time, the remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left, which says "Relief time is shortened with 800 rotations left!". Further, at this time, the explanation regarding the relief time reduction (for example, the explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine provided with the relief time reduction.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-37 (B), for example, when the remaining 700 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 stop and the symbol is off (in this example, "423"). (Combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similarly to FIG. 36-37 (A), the remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left, which says "Relief time reduction starts with 700 rotations left!". Further, at this time, the explanation regarding the relief time reduction (for example, the explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) is displayed at the lower part of the screen by the telop display 100IW103.

In this example, as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and 36-37 (B), a case is shown in which a fanning effect suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 400 to 800 times, the fanning effect is not executed, and when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (hence, the remaining number of times is 300 times, 200 times, 100 times), the fanning effect is performed. It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the fanning effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command for specifying the number of times of relief time 2 is received, a lottery process based on a random number is performed and it is decided to execute the fanning effect. It may be configured to perform the fanning effect in the manner shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and 36-37 (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the fanning effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened decreases.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (C) to 36-38 (E), the countdown display 100IW104A according to the remaining number of revolutions is displayed in the center of the screen after the remaining 10 revolutions until the transition to the relief time reduction. NS. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a state of counting down from "10" to "1" is displayed every time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops. It should be noted that each figure shows an example in which the out-of-order symbols (in this example, a combination of the symbols of "653", "844", and "123") are derived and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (C) to 36-38 (E), the effect display 100IW104B in the range corresponding to the remaining rotation speed is displayed after the remaining 10 rotations until the transition to the relief time reduction. .. In this example, as the remaining number of revolutions decreases (that is, as the relief time shortens approach), the range in which the effect display 100IW104B is displayed becomes wider (the number displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-38 (E), there is only one rotation remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol is stopped and the symbol is out of alignment (in this example, the symbol is out of alignment). It is assumed that the combination of the symbols of "123") is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-38 (F), the remaining 0 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the variation display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 (that is, the variation display that shortens the relief time) is started. As shown in FIG. 36-38 (G), the time saving rushing effect for notifying that the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled is started, and the time saving rushing effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled, and it is possible to improve the interest when the time saving state (relief time saving) is reached.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-38 (G), when the time saving rush effect is started, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 36-38 (H), the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and only the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "254") is derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving rushing effect, notifications that are generally performed during the ending period of the first hit, such as a warning notification for forgetting to remove the prepaid card and a warning notification for preventing immersiveness, may be performed, or the logo of the pachinko / pachislot machine manufacturer. May be displayed. In this case, the notification in the time-saving rush effect may be performed in the same manner as the notification in the ending period of the first hit, or may be notified in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may not be performed in the time saving rush effect, but may be performed in the ending period of the first big hit after shifting to the time saving state due to the relief time saving.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-39 (I), when the symbol determination period is entered, the mode effect start display 100IW105 saying "super heat!" Is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. After that, even in the mode transition effect, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, the operation suggestion image 100IW106 suggesting that the push button 31B (see FIG. 36-1) is operated (pressed) is displayed. NS. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the characters "press" are displayed together with the image prompting the push button 31B to be pressed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-39 (K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time elapses from the display of the operation suggestion image 100IW106, "V" The character display 100IW107 of "STOCK x 1" is displayed, and it is notified that the relief time reduction starts. In addition, a right-handed instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handedness is displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

In this example, even if a big hit occurs, it is possible to execute an effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" as in FIG. 36-39 (K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead determination process of whether or not a big hit is obtained and a variation pattern type look-ahead determination process in the start winning prize determination process (step S101). Sends a look-ahead judgment result specification command that can specify the result. Then, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect (so-called hold continuous effect) in the same manner as in FIG. 36-39 (K) based on the received look-ahead determination result designation command. For example, if it is specified that there is one big hit in the hold memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" is displayed to produce the hold continuous effect. To execute. Further, for example, when it is specified that there are two big hits in the hold storage based on the received look-ahead judgment result specification command, the character display of "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to hold the hold. Perform a series of productions.

On the other hand, when the relief time is shortened, it is highly likely that the fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds is executed during the time reduction state via the relief time reduction (see FIG. 36-8 (E)). ), Therefore, the variable display is extremely quickly digested, and a big hit is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, in the variable display (in this example, the symbol confirmation period) in which the relief time is shortened, the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 36-39 (K) is displayed without confirming the look-ahead determination result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect of displaying the character display of "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 36-39 (K) has the same aspect as the pseudo hold continuous effect, and the relief time is shortened. It is a production to notify.

The case where the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is started from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 of "V STOCK x 1" is shown, but the display start timing of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 is limited to the one shown in this example. No. For example, the display of the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 36-38 (H), and various modes are conceivable.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-39 (L), the mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting the effect mode for shortening the relief time is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. When a predetermined time elapses without selecting the effect mode, the effect mode in which the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-handed instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small symbol 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-40 (M), when the selection of the effect mode is completed, the start notification screen 100IW110 for notifying that the relief time reduction is started is displayed. For example, the words "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, the state shifts to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rushing pretending effect will be described. FIG. 36-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the time-saving rushing masquerade effect. The example shown in FIGS. 36-41 follows the example of FIGS. 36-37 (A) to (D).

As shown in FIG. 36-41 (E), there is only one rotation left until the transition to the relief time reduction, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the symbol stops and comes off (in this example, "123". ”) Is derived and displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (F'), the remaining 0 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, and the variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is started. In this variable display, the relief time is shortened, but the display result is a big hit. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, it does not shift to the time saving state due to the relief time saving, but shifts to the big hit game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (G'), the time-saving rushing effect pretending effect is started, and the time-saving rushing effect display 100IW104C having the same mode as the time-saving rushing effect is displayed on the image display device 5. As shown in FIG. 36-41 (G'), when the time saving rushing effect is started, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed and only the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed, as in the case of starting the time saving rushing effect. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-41 (H), when the display of the time saving rush effect display 100IW104C is completed, the decorative symbol 100IW100 is not displayed when the symbol is stopped, and the small symbol 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol "254") is not displayed. Only the combination of) is derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 is stopped, and the jackpot symbol (in this example, the combination of the symbols of "777") is derived and displayed. After that, it shifts to the big hit game. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the relief time reduction, it is notified that a big hit will be made, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved.

It should be noted that the character game that controls the configuration of the feature unit 108IW to the big hit game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in the specific area (V winning area) in the character during the small hit game is also executed. When applied to a game machine that is configured to be possible, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the relief time is a small hit, a time saving rush pretending effect is executed to notify that the small hit is achieved. May be good.

Next, a mode of producing the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect will be described. FIG. 36-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode of the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect.

As shown in FIGS. 36-42 (A) to (C), when the remaining 49 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called Gase countdown effect is executed, so that the remaining rotation speed is 10 times. A countdown display 100IW104A according to the case is displayed in the center of the screen. Then, every time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops, a state of counting down from "10" is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36-42 (A) to (C), when the remaining 49 rotations are reached until the transition to the relief time reduction, the so-called Gase effect effect is executed, so that the remaining rotation speed is 10. The effect display 100IW104B in the range corresponding to the number of times is displayed. Then, each time the variation display of the symbol ends and the symbol stops, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed so that the display range becomes wider (the number of the symbols displayed increases).

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-42 (E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are displayed before they are displayed in a mode corresponding to the case where the remaining number of revolutions is one until the transition to the relief time reduction. Is terminated. At this time, since the remaining number of revolutions is not 0 until the transition to the relief time reduction, the time reduction rush effect is not executed.

When the so-called Gase countdown effect and effect effect as shown in FIGS. 36-42 are configured to be executable, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and 36-37 (A) and (B). You may not perform the fanning effect that suggests. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish between genuine and fake.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the remaining number of rotations until the relief time is shortened, the effect of the relief time is explained, and the countdown is displayed, but it may be performed at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol or during the fluctuation.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which a symbol confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed in a variable display in which the relief time is shortened, but the symbol confirmation period is normally 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving as it is without performing the mode transition effect.

Further, in this example, the case where the relief time reduction count is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear processing is executed, when the jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is lost is shown. Or, when it is configured to execute a story such as whether to make it fluctuate at high speed, it may be configured to clear the selection buffer and the story counter of the story. In addition, a story may be configured to be settable when the relief time is activated, or a different story may be configured to be settable according to the game state.

(Modification example 1)
In the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, in the variable display that shortens the relief time, a symbol confirmation period of 20 seconds, which is longer than the normal 0.5 second, is set, and a mode transition effect or a right-handed notification is executed during the symbol confirmation period. Although shown, it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation is provided, and the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification are executed during the postponement period. You may. Hereinafter, a modified example 1 in which a mode transition effect and a right-handed notification are executed with a postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation will be described.

FIG. 36-43 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process processing in the first modification. As shown in FIGS. 36-43, in the modified example 1, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 33, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS114) is included in the special symbol process process. In the first modification, the start winning determination process (step 100 IWS101) is executed in the same manner as the start winning determination process (step 101) shown in FIG. 33.

In the first modification, the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. Further, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. Further, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. Further, the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”.

Further, the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”.

Further, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. Further, the jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. Further, the jackpot release post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. Further, the jackpot end processing (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”.

Further, the small hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. Further, the small hit opening process (step 100 IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. Further, the small hit end process (step 100 IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “11”.

In the first modification, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) are the same as the processes of the special symbol normal process (step S110) and the variation pattern setting process (step S111) shown in FIG. Is. Further, in the modified example 1, in the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113), the same 0.5 seconds as usual is set as the symbol determination period even when the relief time is shortened. , The first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is transmitted, which is different from the special symbol variation processing (step S112) and the special symbol stop processing (step S113) shown in FIG. 33.

In the first modification, the big hit opening pre-processing (step 100IWS115) to the small hit end processing (step 100IWS121) are the processes of the big hit opening pre-processing (step S114) to the small hit end processing (step S120) shown in FIG. Is similar to.

FIG. 36-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100 IWS113) in the first modification. In the first modification, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those processing shown in FIGS. 36-16 and 36-17. In the first modification, when the relief time reduction determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation to a predetermined postponement period (20 seconds in this example). A value corresponding to is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). The process of step 100 IWS175 is the same as the process shown in FIG. 36-17.

FIG. 36-45 is a flowchart showing the next fluctuation postponement process (step 100 IWS 114) in the first modification. In the next fluctuation postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and confirms whether or not the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). .. If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the time reduction counter (step 100IWS193) and sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Further, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the time saving state C designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In the modified example 1, in the next fluctuation postponement processing, a case is shown in which the time is shortened at the timing when the postponement period (20 seconds in this example) until the start of the next fluctuation has elapsed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, in the next fluctuation postponement process, right-handed notification may be performed, and the time may be shortened at the start of the postponement period until the start of the next fluctuation or in the middle of the postponement period. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, it may be configured to control the time saving state and perform right-handed notification, or it may be configured to perform only right-handed notification without controlling the time saving state. Aspects are conceivable.

Further, in the modified example 1, the case where 20 seconds is uniformly measured as the postponement period in the next fluctuation postponement processing is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set ("800" is set) at the timing when the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction is configured to be continuously generated, the relief time reduction is performed during the normal state and the time reduction is performed. A different postponement period may be set depending on the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, when the relief time is shortened during the time reduction state, a shorter postponement period is set as compared with the case where the relief time is shortened during the normal state, and the measurement is performed in the next fluctuation postponement process, and the relief time is shortened for the second and subsequent times. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Further, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decorative symbol, but displays only the small symbol so that the small symbol is not hidden by the effecting object or the like. May be good.

Further, in the modified example 1, when the relief time is shortened, the case where the next fluctuation postponement process is executed to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started is shown, but the variation display of the time reduction is not limited to such a mode. Also, it may be configured to extend the period until the next fluctuation is started by executing the next fluctuation postponement processing similar to the first variation.

Further, as described above, when applied to the variation display of the time saving deviation, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIGS. 36-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next variation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the symbol confirmation period of the fluctuation display when the time reduction is lost can be shared to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal fluctuation display, and the processing related to right-handed notification can also be performed in the case of relief time reduction. Can be run in the same process as.

FIG. 36-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when the variable display that shortens the relief time in the first modification is executed. As shown in FIGS. 36-46, in the modified example 1, in the variation display immediately before the variation display in which the relief time is shortened (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is terminated and the pattern is removed. When the symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the time reduction rush effect is executed in the image display device 5 during the variation display of the special symbol. (See step 108 IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbol is finished and the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed for the same 0.5-second symbol confirmation period as usual (step 078IWS1135). reference). Then, when the symbol determination period of 0.5 seconds is completed, as shown in FIGS. 36-46, the next fluctuation postponement period of 20 seconds is started (see step 100 IWS114). Then, in the next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIGS. 36-46, the mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5. Next, when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses during the next fluctuation postponement period, right-handed notification is started in the image display device 5 as shown in FIGS. 36-46. Then, when the next fluctuation postponement period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 36-46, the background image (the present) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. In the example, it can be switched to the background image of the orange display color).

In the case of the configuration as in the first modification, the fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the symbol confirmation period of the outlier symbol, and after the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the next fluctuation postponement process is started (that is, the next fluctuation postponement period). At the start), 4 jackpot signals may be output. The four jackpot signals here are signals that are output externally during the next fluctuation postponement period after the fluctuation display symbol determination period in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission when the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals are output at the same time.

Further, in the case of the configuration as in the modified example 1, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (that is, at the start of the next fluctuation postponement period), the player is in a gaming state in which it is assumed that the player makes a right-handed strike. A test signal or an external output signal indicating the above may be output, or a right-handed notification may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to right-handed strike and to notify right-handed strike at an appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
Further, in the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, the fluctuation pattern table E (see FIG. 36-8 (E)) is uniformly selected during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time saving, and the fluctuation of the high speed fluctuation of 1.5 seconds is performed. The case where the display is executed is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. Hereinafter, modifications 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving is different will be described. 36-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the modified examples 2 to 4 of the modified example 8-37, which is a method of selecting the variation pattern in the time-reduced state based on the relief time-saving.

First, with reference to FIG. 36-47 (A), a method of selecting a variation pattern in the time saving state based on the relief time saving in the modification 2 will be described. In the above-mentioned feature unit 108IW, there is a case where the variation display is executed 800 times after the RAM clear processing (without becoming a big hit or a time saving loss), or after a big hit or a time saving loss (the next big hit or a time saving loss). Fluctuation pattern tables F, G (FIGS. 36-8 (F), (G)) from 10 before the fluctuation, which uniformly shortens the relief time, without distinguishing whether or not the fluctuation display is executed 800 times (without becoming). Select (see) and execute the fluctuation display for 5 seconds or 12 seconds at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and effect effect. After the relief time is shortened and the time is controlled to the time reduction state, the fluctuation pattern table E (Fig.) 36-8 (E)) is selected to execute the fluctuation display of high-speed fluctuation for 1.5 seconds, but the mode is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in the second modification of FIG. 36-47, when the relief time is shortened by executing the fluctuation display 800 times after the RAM clearing process, the relief time is shortened from 10 fluctuations before to 1 fluctuation before. Also selects the fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 36-7 (B)) to execute the same fluctuation display as usual, and after the time reduction state is controlled based on the relief time reduction, the fluctuation pattern table C (FIG. 36-7) (See (C)) may be selected to select a fluctuation pattern similar to the time saving state during the jackpot, and the fluctuation display of 5 seconds may be executed at a high rate.

Further, for example, as shown in the modified example 3 of FIG. 36-47, in the case where the relief time is shortened by executing the variation display 800 times after the big hit, the variation is changed when the 800th variation display is executed. A variation pattern for relief time saving variation deviation (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) is selected from the pattern table I (see FIG. 36-8 (I)), and variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. The feature unit 108IW is configured to execute a time saving rush effect during the variation display, and execute a mode transition effect and a right-handed notification during the symbol confirmation period. For example, during the variation display for 25 seconds. In, the mode transition effect and the right-handed notification may be executed (thus, in this case, the symbol confirmation period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 36-47, if the relief time is shortened after the RAM clear processing and the relief time is shortened after the big hit, the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern in the variation display that is the relief time is different. It is possible to make the effect different, and it is also possible to make the effect different from the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern in the variation display after shifting to the time saving state via the relief time saving.

Further, for example, as shown in the modified example 4 of FIG. 36-47, the fluctuation pattern table B (see FIG. 36-7 (B)) is selected even from 10 fluctuations before the relief time to 1 fluctuation before the relief time is shortened. Perform the same fluctuation display as usual, select the fluctuation pattern table C (see Fig. 36-7 (C)) during the time reduction state based on the first relief time reduction, and select the fluctuation pattern similar to the time reduction state when passing through the jackpot. Select to execute a 5-second variation display at a high rate, select the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 36-8 (E)) during the time reduction state based on the second relief time reduction, and select a high speed of 1.5 seconds. It may be configured to perform a variation display of the variation.

(Example 2)
Next, the gaming machine according to the second embodiment in the feature unit 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 36-48 to 36-54. In addition, about Example 2, the part which is different from Example 1 will be mainly described.

In Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. Therefore, in the second embodiment, as in the fluctuation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 36-8 (F) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table G as shown in FIG. 36-8 (G), immediately before the relief time is shortened. There is no variable pattern table for this. That is, if the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 36-8 (F) and 36-8 (G) only immediately before the relief time reduction, the player notices that it is immediately before the relief time reduction due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern. However, by not using such a fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to prevent it from being noticed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is not a dedicated variation pattern in the relief time reduction, but a variation pattern used in the variation display in which the relief time is not shortened (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). Is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the relief time is shortened as in the fluctuation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 36-8 (I) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table J as shown in FIG. 36-8 (J). There is no variation pattern table for variation when it becomes. With such a configuration, it is possible to standardize the fluctuation pattern when the relief time is shortened and before the relief time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the fluctuation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 36-48 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 36-7 (A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is off), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability change flag is set (that is, in the probability change state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table for deviation in the probability change state shown in FIG. 36-8 (H) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select H (step 100 IWS 1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table H on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 36-7 (C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table C for the outlier in the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table C on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag B indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation as shown in FIG. 36-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table D for the outlier in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage counter, selects the variation pattern table D on condition that the value of the total pending storage counter is 1 or more, and sets the value of the total pending storage counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no hold storage), the variation pattern table B for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) is selected.

If the time saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 uses the relief time saving as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. 36-8 (E). The variation pattern table E for the outlier in the time saving state controlled via the method is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviation in the normal state shown in FIG. 36-7 (B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100 IWS 1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715, and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 36-7 and 36-8 should be used (step 100IWS1716).

When the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 controls to transmit the variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer and measures the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the variation display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is started (step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation processing (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demo production control process in Example 2)
As described above, in Example 2, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. Therefore, a telop display indicating that the rescue time saving function is provided is performed based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command (see FIG. 36-26), but the relief is performed depending on whether or not this telop display is executed and the production mode. It is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the time is shortened and the relief time is close. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command, the telop display for explaining the relief time reduction is always performed in a common manner.

Also in the second embodiment, it may be possible to suggest that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction are close depending on whether or not the telop display is executed and the effect mode. However, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the telop display is restricted (for example, the execution rate decreases) as compared with the period before that. Or do not do it). With this configuration, when the relief time is shortened, the background image is suddenly changed (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time is started) is suddenly executed, which surprises the player. It can be given to improve the interest.

(Variable display start setting process in Example 2)
Next, the variable display start setting process in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 36-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100 IWS801). Next, the effect control CPU 120 displays a decorative symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command). The symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets the execution of the advance notice effect to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a notice effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation and an effect image suggesting a jackpot expectation is displayed when the count number becomes "0". In step 108IWS802A, the timer effect is executed. You may set the execution of.

FIG. 36-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the advance notice effect execution determination table and the advance notice effect mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, whether or not the advance notice effect is executed is determined by using the advance notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 36-50 (A) regardless of the number of remaining times until the relief time is shortened. Further, when it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the effect mode of the advance notice effect is determined using the advance notice effect mode determination table shown in FIG. 36-50 (B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 36-50 (A) and 36-50 (B), regardless of the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened, whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode when the advance notice effect is executed are determined. It is configured to be determined by a common ratio. Further, also in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the relief time is shortened and the time saving state C is shifted, the background image corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed in the image display device 5. (In this example, the background image of the orange display color) is configured to be switched (see step 078IWS638). With such a configuration, a change in the background image (that is, a notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. can.

As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, it is not suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close. The process for executing the countdown effect and the effect effect, and the process for displaying the initial result according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened are omitted.

In addition, also in Example 2, it may be possible to execute a fanning effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. However, in the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the fanning effect, the countdown effect, and the effect effect is restricted (for example). , The execution rate is reduced or not executed). With this configuration, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed, so that the player is surprised and the interest is improved. be able to.

Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display in which the relief time is shortened is not a dedicated variation pattern in the relief time reduction, but a variation pattern used in the variation display in which the relief time is not shortened (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1). (Normal variation)) is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the process for executing the time-saving rushing effect and the time-saving rushing masquerading effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is performed, the change of the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108 IWS812.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the effect control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step 108IWS814).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in Example 2)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 36-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variation display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 36-51, in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the special symbol fluctuation time (the special symbol fluctuation time () after the fluctuation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started. When (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, it ends, and when the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, the out-of-order symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100IWS1137). Next, in the variation display (see steps 100IWS74 and S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 at the start of the variation display and the relief time is shortened, the variation display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is started as in the immediately preceding variation display. When the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, the missed symbol (no time reduction) is stopped and displayed, and the missing symbol (no time reduction) is confirmed and displayed over the symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds. (See step 100 IWS1137). Then, when the symbol determination period elapses, the process shifts to the time saving state C, and as shown in FIGS. 36-51, the background image (this example) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving) in the image display device 5. Then, it can be switched to the orange display color background image) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and prevent the production from becoming complicated. In addition, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the relief time is shortened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36-51, the right-handed notification is executed during the period in which the variation display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the transition to the time saving state C (FIG. 36-52 (C1). )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game state is a right-handed game while suppressing the production related to the transition to the time saving state C from becoming complicated, and the player is disadvantaged. Can be suppressed.

(Example of production in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, will be described. FIG. 36-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the state shifts to the time saving state. In addition, in FIG. 36-52, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (A), when the variation display for shortening the relief time is started and the special figure variation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (B). In addition, the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are derived and displayed as a combination of the outlier symbols.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (C1), the image display device 5 responds to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving). The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed.

If the hold storage is not stored when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the image display device 5 is based on the reception of the customer waiting demo designation command, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (C2). In the above, the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) may be switched, and the right-handed notification may be executed.

Further, at the timing shown in FIGS. 36-52 (C1) and (C2), the explanation regarding the relief time reduction by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and (B) (for example, the relief time reduction function and the relief time reduction) (Explanation of the production in) may be performed. Further, although the effect suggesting that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is near is not executed, the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and (B) is performed at an arbitrary timing. May be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in FIGS. 36-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that the time reduction control by the relief time reduction is started) is suddenly executed. Can be improved.

In addition, the change in the gaming state can be clearly notified to the player, and the interest when the relief time is shortened can be improved. In addition, it is possible to standardize the fluctuation pattern when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that the effect mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, is not limited to that shown in FIGS. 36-52. For example, the modification 1 shown in FIG. 36-53 and the modification 2 shown in FIG. 36-53 may be used.

(Production example in Example 2 [Modification example 1])
FIG. 36-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the relief time is shortened in the modified example 1 of the second embodiment.

In the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 36-53, as shown in FIG. 36-53 (A), the variation display immediately before the variation display that shortens the relief time is stopped, and then the variation display that shortens the relief time is started. As shown in FIG. 36-53 (B), a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 is executed. Will be done.

Then, when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) elapses, as shown in FIG. 36-53 (C), the blackout state is eliminated, and the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are derived by a combination of the outlier symbols. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 36-53 (D), the image display device 5 responds to the time saving state C (time saving state via the relief time saving). The background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) is switched to, and the right-handed notification is executed. At the timing of FIG. 36-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image display or an output sound for notifying that the control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started is performed. May be good.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. Note that the effect shown in FIGS. 36-53 can be obtained by selecting, for example, a process table including a time reduction rush effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a relief time reduction in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

(Production example in Example 2 [Modification 2])
FIG. 36-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the relief time is shortened in the modified example 2 of the second embodiment.

In the modified example 2 shown in FIG. 36-54, as shown in FIG. 36-54 (A), the variation display that shortens the relief time is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variation time (for example, 12 seconds) is started. For example, after 8 seconds), as shown in FIGS. 36-54 (B), the decorative symbol 100IW100 is temporarily stopped and displayed in the image display device 5 in combination with the detached symbols. However, at the timing shown in FIGS. 36-54 (B), since the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed, the small symbol 100IW101 is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 36-54 (C), in the image display device 5, a time-saving rush effect (blackout effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100) displayed immediately before. Will be executed. Further, the special symbol fluctuation time elapses while the time saving rush effect (blackout effect) is being executed, and the small symbol 100IW101 is derived and displayed as a combination of the outlier symbols. The time saving rush effect (blackout effect) is continuously executed even during the symbol confirmation period.

Then, when the symbol determination period elapses and the next variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 36-54 (D), the blackout state is eliminated in the image display device 5, and the time saving state C ( It is possible to switch to the background image (in this example, the background image of the orange display color) according to the time saving state (time saving state via the relief time saving). Further, as shown in FIG. 36-54 (D), right-handed notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. Note that the effect shown in FIGS. 36-53 can be obtained by selecting, for example, a process table including a time reduction rush effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a relief time reduction in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

Relief by the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and 36-37 (B) at the timings shown in FIGS. 36-53 (C) and (D), 36-54 (C) and (D). An explanation regarding the time reduction (for example, an explanation of the relief time reduction function and the effect of the relief time reduction) may be given. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In Example 1 of the feature unit 108IW shown above, in the period before the relief time is shortened (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), the fluctuation pattern that becomes the super reach is determined. , The decision to execute the advance notice effect is restricted, while in the second embodiment, none of them is restricted. However, by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened. In the period of (for example, the period in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and the notice of the type in which the degree of expectation is not so high among the notice effects is determined. The production may be made feasible. That is, it is possible to limit the determination of the fluctuation pattern that becomes the super reach, and also limit the execution of the notice effect of the type with high expectation among the advance notice effects.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, as an effect suggesting that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time reduction are close (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect), a fanning effect or a countdown effect, The effect effect is executed, and the initial appearance and the telop display waiting for the customer (for example, the telop display 108IW101 shown in FIGS. 36-26) are displayed according to the number of times until the relief time is shortened. Not limited. For example, an operation effect of operating the movable body 32 at an arbitrary timing during the fluctuation display or a fluctuation stop, a light emission effect in which a light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a specific mode (for example, a rainbow is made to emit light), or a movable body 32. Depending on the execution frequency and execution mode of the vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, and the like, it may be suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and the relief time is close.

Further, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification shown above, an effect control command (for example, an effect control command instructing recovery from a power failure or an effect control command instructing initialization) transmitted when the power is turned on is transmitted. , When the effect cannot be received normally on the production control board 12 side (for example, when a command is missed or a command is garbled), it is usually based on a command for specifying the game state or a command for specifying a fluctuation pattern. Although the effect of It may be possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous relief suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification shown above, the relief time reduction number 1 designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command (in this example, transmission is performed each time the variation display is executed) to specify the number of fluctuations up to the relief time reduction. If the message is not received normally, the relief suggestion effect may not be executed. In this case, the relief suggestion effect may not be executed only during the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction number 1 specified command or the relief time reduction number 2 specified command could not be received normally, or the relief may be performed until the next big hit occurs. The suggestion effect may not be executed. In addition, for example, when the reception is not performed normally, the relief suggestion effect is executed in an effect mode or execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that shortens the relief time is large (that is, the relief time is not close to the time reduction). You may. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to an erroneous relief suggestion effect.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, a case where the application is applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variation display result is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a character game that controls a big hit game based on a game ball winning (V prize) in a specific area (V winning area) in the character during a small hit game. The configuration for controlling the feature portion 108IW shown above and the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in each modification may be applied.

Further, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the value set in the relief time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear processing is executed or the jackpot occurs, or the value set in the relief time reduction counter at random may be set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving flag C is set each time the relief time saving occurs is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numerical value) set in the second relief time saving that has been transferred again may be different from the time saving flag (third numerical value) set in the first relief time saving.

In addition, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving have different effects (variation patterns) is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the time saving state after the big hit and the relief time saving may have the same effect (variation pattern). Specifically, even if the same notification (notification shown in FIG. 36-39 (K), notification suggesting future big hit acquisition, etc.) is performed as the end of the time reduction state after the big hit and the start of the relief time reduction. good.

In addition, in the feature portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the effect (variation pattern) is different between the time reduction state of the time reduction and the relief time reduction is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the same effect (variation pattern) may be used for the time saving state where the time saving is off and the relief time saving. Specifically, even if the same notification (notification shown in FIG. 36-39 (K), notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition, etc.) is performed as the end of the time reduction state that is out of the time reduction and the start of the relief time reduction. good.

As described above, the features 108IW and each of the modified examples disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1A) to (means 8A).

(Means 1A) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) is provided, and the state control means is updated by the update means. By setting the numerical information to a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the game control. The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the computer 100 for game control, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-17), the updating means is the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the above is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Steps in the effect control CPU 120, as shown in FIGS. 36-49, which can execute a predetermined suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect) when the variable display is being executed. 108IWS811 is executed) and a special notification effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-52 (C1) and (C2)) for notifying that the control of the special state is started based on the establishment of the special condition. Special notification that can execute (such as changing the background image, blacking out at the start of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-53 (B), blacking out at the end of fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-54 (C), etc.) Production execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-23) The effect control CPU 120 further includes (a portion where the step 100 IWS638 is executed), and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect in the period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, FIG. 36). As shown in −44, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See Figure 36-50). According to such a configuration, the player can be surprised by suddenly executing the special notification effect, and the interest can be improved.

(Means 2A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification effect is the special notification effect in the display means. This is an embodiment in which it is difficult to visually recognize the effect display displayed before the start (for example, blackout is performed at the start of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-53 (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, an effect variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display of the effect identification information (for example, a decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. The special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification effect is an embodiment in which the identification information for the effect is difficult to see (for example). , Blacked out at the end of the fluctuation as shown in FIG. 36-54 (C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect is displayed. In this mode, the background display in the means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed. NS). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. In addition, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) In any one of means 1A to 4A, an explanatory effect executing means capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition is provided (for example, FIGS. 36-52 (C1), (C2). ), At the timing shown in FIGS. 36-53 (D) and 36-54 (D), the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and 36-37 (B) will be described). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any of means 1A to means 5A, a variable display pattern determining means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100 determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns) shows a variation pattern shown in FIGS. 36-48. The variable display pattern determining means is provided with a variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined when the special condition is satisfied and even before the special condition is satisfied. )), The special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect after the non-specific display result (for example, the out-of-order symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. It is possible to improve the interest when is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. A portion for executing S112) and a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer and a second hold storage) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. A buffer), a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information updated by the update means and hold information stored by the hold storage means even when the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied. An initialization means that can execute an initialization process that initializes the stored contents of the backup storage means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) and backup storage when the power supply is started. A recovery means capable of executing a recovery process for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6). Part) and. According to such a configuration, a power failure occurs in a situation where the hold storage corresponding to the variable display of the special number of times is stored before the power supply is stopped while optimizing the control by the initialization process. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages for the player when the game is played.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to the means 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the states of the time saving flags A to C) capable of identifying that the special state is controlled, and a special state storage means. Execution count storage means that can store execution count information (for example, the value of the time reduction counter) that can specify the number of times the variable display is executed in the state, and special state information and execution count information even if the power supply is stopped. A backup storage means that can hold numerical information (for example, RAM 102) and an initialization means that can execute an initialization process that initializes the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, game control). A portion of the computer 100 for executing step S8), and the initialization means holds special state information, execution count information, and numerical information by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the states of the time reduction flags A to C and the value of the time reduction counter are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power failure is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1B) to (means 5B).

(Means 1B) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100, the portion in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), a predetermined variable display pattern, and a predetermined variable display pattern are more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern having a long display period (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)). A pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 36-14) is provided, and the state control means variably displays the numerical information updated by the updating means. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 36-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the second identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not (for example, FIG. 36-7 (for example, FIG. 36-7). A) , (B), the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) can be determined in both the case of a big hit and the case of a miss). When the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-7 (A), the variable pattern PA2- 2 (super reach α) and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are more likely to be determined in the case of a big hit than fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation)), before the special conditions are satisfied. In the predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that in the period before the predetermined period (for example, FIG. 36-8 (F)). , (G), the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low immediately before the relief time is shortened). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the variable display by the specific variable display pattern is executed in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) The means 1B includes a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display waiting for a customer) related to the establishment of a special condition, and the suggestion effect execution means is provided. The rate of executing the suggestion effect is higher in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control CPU 120 in step 108IWS807. A portion for executing ~ S809; a portion for the effect control CPU 120 to execute 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, the player can be expected to establish the special condition, and the interest can be improved. In addition, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage for the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or means 2B, an explanatory effect regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and (B), a telop display 100IW103 is used for explanation). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 3B. The notice effect executing means can execute the notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result. Is higher in the case where the specific display result is obtained than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). (For example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31), the rate of executing the advance notice effect when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result is lower than that of the period before the predetermined period. , The portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS802A. See FIGS. 36-32 (A) and 36-32 (B). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the notice effect is executed in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 5B) Execution of a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed in any of the means 1B to the means 4B. The notice effect executing means is provided with means, and the specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") is defined in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and the case where the display result is not the specific display result. The notice effect can be executed depending on the mode (for example, the effect mode "blue"), and when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result, the ratio of executing the notice effect in the specific mode is higher than that of the predetermined mode. When the variable display display result is not the specific display result in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied (for example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is 10 or less) is less than the period before the predetermined period. In addition, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low depending on the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A. See FIGS. 36-32 (C) and 36-32 (D)). .. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the specific display result is not derived and displayed even though the advance notice effect is executed in the specific mode in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1C) to (means 8C).

(Means 1C) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the portion in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control computer 100) and the special variable display pattern (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1 (for example, the variation pattern PA3-1)) in which the numerical information can be updated. Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including (inrush out)) (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 36-14). , And the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 36-17, step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, in FIG. 36-13). As shown, the variable display pattern determining means in the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100IWS71) can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and before the special condition is satisfied. In, the special variable display pattern is not determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, the portion where steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special variable is not determined. When the variable display by the display pattern is executed, the specific notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31) capable of executing the specific notification effect for notifying that the special state is controlled is used for game control. A portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 108 IWS806B. 36-38 (G), (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification effect executing means executes the specific notification effect when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. When the variable display that is possible and the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is executed after the effect of the same mode as the specific notification effect is executed. Is executed by the special notification effect executing means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-31, step 108 IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100). 41 (see (G'), (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes the establishment of the special condition, it is notified that the player is controlled in an advantageous state, so that the player can be surprised and the interest can be improved. Can be done.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is not executed before the special condition is satisfied. A predetermined notification effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification effect (for example, full rotation effect) for notifying that the specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and special feeling, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 4C) In the means 1C or the means 2C, when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is executed and the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the mode common to that before the special condition is satisfied. A notification effect execution means capable of executing a notification effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, even when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the value varies as in the case where the value is not 0. It is provided with a pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and a fluctuation pattern PB2-3 (realized by being determined by super reach β)). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to means 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the variable display display result when the special condition is satisfied is the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. The special condition is satisfied for longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-15, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS1135. See FIG. 36-36). In the display period of the display result of the variable display at the time of the operation, the notification effect execution means (for example, FIG. 36-33) capable of executing the notification effect (for example, the mode transition effect) for notifying that the control of the special state is started is shown. As shown, the effect control CPU 120 includes a portion that executes step 100 IWS847). According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification effect in the normal state, clarify the effect when switching the game state, and improve the interest.

(Means 6C) At the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied in any of the means 1C to the means 5C, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. Is output, and after the specific signal is output, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, four jackpot signals) corresponding to the control of the special state is provided (see, for example, FIG. 36-18). According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission.

(Means 7C) In the means 6C, the signal output means performs a special process (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIGS. 36-45) executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. ) Is started, a special signal is output. According to such a configuration, when a specific signal and a special signal are output at the same time, it is possible to avoid an external signal omission.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to means 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific route (for example, a left-handed route) can pass. ), A second passage area (for example, a second start winning opening) provided at a position where a game medium passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means (for example, game control) capable of executing variable display of the first identification information based on the satisfaction of one start condition and variable display of the second identification information based on the satisfaction of the second start condition (for example, game control). A part where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route (for example, in a gaming state in which the player is expected to make a right-handed strike). It is provided with a special output means capable of executing an output of a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the computer is present, and a notification that the player is in a state of right-handed striking. Is satisfied based on the passage of, the second start condition is satisfied based on the passage of the game medium through the second passage region, and the special output means is the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. The special output can be executed at the start of the special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement processing shown in FIGS. 36-45) that is executed after the display period of. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward the special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1D) to (means 5D).

(Means 1D) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the portion in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71) and a variable display pattern for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. A display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 36-48) is provided, and the state control means is variable in the numerical information updated by the updating means. By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of display execution, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Step 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 36-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed by variable display of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the second identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control computer 100). The variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)) that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied when the special condition is satisfied, and the special condition is satisfied. A special notification effect (for example, a background image corresponding to a reduction in relief time) for notifying that control of a special state is started after a non-specific display result (for example, an outlier symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display to be performed (for example, a background image corresponding to a reduction in relief time). Orange) display) can be executed A special notification effect executing means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100 IWS638) is further provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest when the special condition is satisfied. In addition, the variable display pattern can be standardized when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In the means 1D, a variable display executing means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112). And the hold storage means (for example, the first hold storage number buffer and the second hold storage number buffer) that can store the information related to the variable display as the hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and the hold storage. The look-ahead notice execution means is provided with a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means. Of the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied, it is possible to execute a look-ahead advance notice effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, while the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is satisfied. The execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect for which the variable display after the display is the advance notice is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-27, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or the means 2D, the special notification effect executing means can execute the special notification effect when the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect can be executed. Is an embodiment in which the background display in the display means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (see, for example, FIG. 36-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest, and it is possible to prevent the production from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) A suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a telop display waiting for a customer, etc.) related to the establishment of a special condition is provided in any of the means 1D to the means 3D. , The suggestion effect execution means restricts the execution of the suggestion effect in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

(Means 5D) An explanatory effect executing means (for example, FIGS. 36-52 (C1), (C2)) capable of executing an explanatory effect relating to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition in any of the means 1D to the means 4D. At the timings shown in FIGS. 36-53 (D) and 36-54 (D), the telop display 100IW103 as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) and 36-37 (B) will be described). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1E) to (means 4E).

(Means 1E-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 36-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and variable display are executed. From the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined variable display pattern, which can update the numerical information based on the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a variable display pattern determining means) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a shortened variable display pattern (for example, variable pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation)) in which the variable display period is shortened. The game control microcomputer 100 includes a portion that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 36-14), and the state control means is based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. After being controlled to an advantageous state, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, it is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the game control microcomputer. Step 100IWS74 in 100, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 36-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100 IWS71 in the game control computer 100 is actually performed. As for the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is less in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled in the advantageous state. A portion for executing step 108 IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-14, in a high proportion of determining the shortened variable display pattern when a specific display result is obtained. See FIGS. 36-7 (C) and 36-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display being executed by the shortened variable display pattern increases, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled. Will be shortened, so it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

(Means 1E-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 36-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and variable display are executed. An update means capable of updating numerical information based on (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion in which step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of reach effect. Variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including the variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) (for example, for game control). The state control means is provided with a portion in which the microcomputer 100 executes the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 36-14), and the state control means is in an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100 IWS537), and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 36-17, a part for executing step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is executed with variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed. In the variable display pattern determining means, the display result of the variable display is not specified in the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. A portion for executing step 108 IWS 1714 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-14, at a low rate of determining the specific variable display pattern when the display result is obtained. See FIGS. 36-7 (C) and 36-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the ratio of the variable display display result by the specific variable display pattern to the non-specific display result becomes low, which reduces the interest. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In the means 1E, a background display means capable of displaying different background displays in the display means depending on the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-23, a portion for executing steps 100 IWS634 and S638 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or the means 2E, a variable display executing means (for example, a game control microcomputer 100) that can execute a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112). And a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage buffer) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. , A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means, and executes the look-ahead notice. The means is a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. The ratio of whether or not to execute the effect is different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-27, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS703. See FIGS. 36-28 (A) and 36-28 (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of the look-ahead advance notice effect are determined between the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state and the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied. It can be different and can improve the interest.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to the means 3E, the variable display executing means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 is a step) capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition. (Part where S112 is executed) and a hold storage means (for example, a first hold storage buffer or a second hold storage) that can store information related to variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not met. A buffer) and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance eye effect or a hold change effect) for a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. The look-ahead notice execution means can execute a look-ahead notice effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the hold information stored before the special condition is satisfied. The execution of the pre-reading advance notice effect for which the variable display after the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is to be announced is restricted (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-27, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108 IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process and avoid inconsistency in the production contents.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1a) to (means 10a).

(Means 1a) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17). Based on the execution of step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control computer 100, the part in which step 100IWS537 is executed in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion of the game control computer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), and the state control means are updated by the update means. When the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, step 100 IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-17), the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed. It is characterized in that the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100). do. According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information is continuously updated, so that the player can be easily rescued and the motivation for the game is increased. Can be done.

In this example, the case where the initial value is set in the relief time reduction counter when a big hit occurs is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, multiple types of jackpots (big hits that are not given time reduction, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) are provided, and the initial value of the relief time reduction counter is not set for some jackpots. It may be configured as follows.

In this example, the case where the first special symbol is mainly changed in the normal state is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number of reserved memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In the means 1a, the special condition is satisfied based on the fact that a predetermined display result (for example, an outlier symbol) different from the specific display result is continuously derived and displayed a special number of times as the display result of the variable display (means 2a). For example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, and step 100IWS75, and as shown in FIG. 36-17, the game control microcomputer. It may be configured to execute step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in 100). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game because the display result, which is disadvantageous to the player, is relieved when the display result is continuously derived and displayed.

(Means 3a) In the means 1a or the means 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a probabilistic state, a time saving state) (for example, FIG. 36). As shown in -17, it may be configured to execute step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the relief of the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being once controlled to the special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so that it can be controlled to the special state until it is substantially controlled to the advantageous state. As a result, the investment of the player can be suppressed and the disadvantage to the player can be prevented.

In this example, the case where the relief time reduction counter is updated based on the low probability low base (normal state), the high probability high base (probability variation state), and the low probability high base (time reduction state) is shown. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states of low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probability change state), low probability high base (time reduction state), and high probability low base (latent probability change). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it can be applied to a gaming machine that executes a lottery for falling to a normal state in a probabilistic state.

In this example, the case where the second special symbol is preferentially digested is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided at the first starting winning opening, a high probability low base (small hit RUSH) in which small hits occur frequently is provided, and the game balls are digested in the order of winning, the first special symbol and the second special. The symbols may be configured to fluctuate at the same time.

In this example, the case where the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to provide only the first special symbol.

(Means 4a) In any of means 1a to means 3a, the updating means sets numerical information as an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, a game control microcomputer. A portion of 100 that executes step 100IWS135, a portion that executes step 100IWS144, and a portion that executes step 100IWS167 of the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-17) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 5a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, a portion for executing step 100 IWS 135 in the game control microcomputer 100). It may have been done. According to such a configuration, when the player is controlled in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 6a) In the means 4a, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (for example, FIG. 36). As shown in -17, the part in which the step 100 IWS166 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, the game The part that executes step 100 IWS167 in the control microcomputer 100) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when it is controlled to a special state, it becomes an advantageous situation for the player, and it is not necessary to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming higher than necessary.

(Means 7a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, the portion where the step 100 IWS 144 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executed). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it is possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) The means 4a includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information to be updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped when the power supply is stopped. , Set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the initial value when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of the initialization process) (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-11, the game control microcomputer. (Part of executing step 100IWS12 in 100), a predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-11, a part of executing step 100IWS8 and step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100). ) May be configured. According to such a configuration, when the initialization is performed in the amusement park, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained, it may be too disadvantageous for the amusement park, so it is operated for the amusement park. It can be made easier.

(Means 9a) In any of the means 1a to the means 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period equal to or greater than the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Based on the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed, the part where step 100IWS172 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-17), and the variable display of the special number of times is executed in the special state. It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 36-17, the game. (Part of executing step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes different effects in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIGS. 36-47). It may be configured as shown in Example 4). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the situation is not controlled to the advantageous state for a long period of time, so measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display should be taken. By changing the production mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(Means 10a) In any of the means 1a to the means 8a, an effect control means corresponding to variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, a portion for executing steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) is provided. The control means can be controlled to a special state for a specific period equal to or greater than the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Based on the part where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed, the part where step 100IWS172 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-17), and the variable display of the special number of times is executed in the special state. It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 36-17, the game. (Part of executing step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the effect control means executes a common effect in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, FIG. 36-47). It may be configured as shown in the modified example 2 and the modified example 3). According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, the advantageous state is not controlled for a long period of time. Therefore, by intentionally performing the same effect, the advantageous state is obtained for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily aware of the uncontrolled situation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

Further, in the present feature portion 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b) are disclosed.

(Means 1b-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming area that is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can divide the game medium into a first path (for example, a left-handed path) and a second path (for example, a right-handed path). Step 100 IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17, are state control means that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state. The part to be executed, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the part to execute step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the updating means (for example, the part where the numerical information can be updated based on the execution of the variable display). As shown in FIG. 36-13, a game required to execute a plurality of types of processes including a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS71), variable display control, and advantageous state control. A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) that updates the data value indicating the progress state and executes the process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13). In addition, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-17), the updating means is Numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the game control microcomputer 100. The process execution means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the step 100 in the game control microcomputer 100). The part where S110 to S113 are executed), the data value is When the second numerical value is different from the first numerical value, the second process relating to the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, the portion where steps S114 to S117 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the data value is When the first numerical value and the third numerical value are different from the second numerical value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-43). (Part of executing step 100 IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), in the normal state, the game medium is launched to the first path to perform the game, and in the special state, the game medium is launched to the second path to play the game. It is characterized in that it is provided with a launch promotion notification means (see FIGS. 36-46) that executes a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1b-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. As shown in FIG. 36-17, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. , Step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and variable display are executed. Update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), variable display control, and advantageous state control are provided. A process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, for game control) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including the computer and executes a process corresponding to the data value. The state control means is provided with (a portion for executing step S25 in the microcomputer 100), and the state control means is put into a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times. It is controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion for executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 36-17, a step in the game control microcomputer 100. 100IWS172, the part where step 100IWS173 is executed), the updating means updates the numerical information between the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 36-13, the process executing means executes the first process related to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the portion that executes step 100 IWS 67 in the game control computer 100) (for example, FIG. As shown in FIG. 33, the part in which steps S110 to S113 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second process relating to the advantageous state is executed (for example, FIG. As shown in 33, a computer for game control (Part of executing steps S114 to S117) in the computer 100), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means controls the third numerical value to a special state based on the establishment of the special condition. A notification effect that executes a process (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-43, a portion that executes step 100 IWS 114 in the game control microcomputer 100) and notifies that the third process is controlled to a special state during execution. (See FIG. 36-46). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by performing the launch promotion notification to the second path before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to execute an effect related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

In this example, the case where the processing related to the big hit is prioritized is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to give priority to the process related to the variable display and the process related to the relief time reduction.

In this example, the case of right-handed notification in the next fluctuation postponement processing, which is the third processing, is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to execute only the mode transition effect suggesting the transition to the time saving state without performing the right-handed notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and the means 1b-2, the processing executing means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied (means 2b). For example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 may be executed and step 100IWS114 may not be executed). According to such a configuration, since the control of the advantageous state is prioritized, the result is not disadvantageous to the player, and the deterioration of the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In means 1b-1, means 1b-2 or means 2b, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, for game control. (Part of executing step 100 IWS71 in the microcomputer 100), the processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, FIG. 36). As shown in -17, the part that executes step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, FIG. As shown in 36-16, the portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100 IWS145) executes different processing when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, FIG. As shown in 36-14, it may be configured to execute step 100 IWS 1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the process of shifting to the special state can be suitably executed by managing the special information.

(Means 4b) Means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion for executing step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) and is variable. The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14, step 100 IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. The part that executes) may be configured. According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

(Means 5b) Means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) and is variable. The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-15, for game control. It may be configured to execute step 100IWS1128 and step 100IWS1130 in the microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, the effect can be suitably executed when the variable display of a special number of times is executed.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1c) to (means 6c).

(Means 1c) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step S25) and a variable display, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can control the game. (For example, as shown in FIG. 35, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIG. 36-31, step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120. The game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17). In addition, step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and variable display are executed. Based on this, the updating means that can update the numerical information (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part that executes step 100 IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the state controlled by the state control means The state control means includes a state information control means for controlling the identifiable state information, and the state control means is put into a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result as the display result of the variable display. It is controllable (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-12, the part where step 100IWS64 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17. In addition, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is a case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and a case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. In number The value information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means sets the state information as the first numerical value in the normal state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 36-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flags A and C are not set, and the corresponding data is "0". ”), The state information is set as the second numerical value when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display and then controlled to the advantageous state and then to the special state (for example, FIG. 36-19). As shown in the above, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is “1”), based on the fact that the special condition is satisfied. When controlled to a special state, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, a portion for executing step 100 IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100. That is, the time saving flag C is set, the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), and the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means, and when it is in a special state, the state information It is possible to transmit specific information according to the case where is the second numerical value and the case where is the third numerical value (for example, the part shown in FIG. 36-10, as shown in FIG. 36-19, the game control micro. A portion of the computer 100 that executes step 100IWS540, and a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS174). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

In this example, the case where the time saving state A designation command and the time saving state C designation command are transmitted as specific information is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the background specification command and the fluctuation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a mode that can be identified as being in the time saving state via the jackpot, the time saving state via the time saving loss, or the time saving state via the relief time saving. May be good. In addition, for example, when a big hit occurs, a big hit start designation command (fanfare designation command) or a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) is transmitted in different modes depending on the game state, and depending on which command is received. It may be configured so that the fanfare period and the ending period change.

(Means 2c) In the means 1c, when the special condition is satisfied again after the state information control means is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, the state information is subjected to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value (for example, a portion for executing step 100 IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since different gaming states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if specific information is also changed at that time, the effect can be preferably executed when the effect control means executes different effects.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or the means 2c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means satisfies the special condition. The effect may be different from that when the special state is controlled based on the above (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to execute steps 100 IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any of the means 1c to the means 3c, the effect control means controls the state control means to a special state based on the derivation and display of the specific display result, and the state control means is special. It is possible to execute a common effect when the condition is controlled based on the condition being satisfied (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS634 and step 100IWS638). It may be configured in. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

(Means 5c) In any of the means 1c to the means 4c, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result (for example, a time saving deviation) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means is based on the fact that the state control means derives and displays the special display result. It is possible to execute different effects depending on whether the state control means is controlled to the special state or the state control means is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is in step 100 IWS636). It may be configured to execute S638). According to such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of the special condition can be efficiently digested, so that it becomes possible to execute the production according to the situation and improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any of the means 1c to the means 4c, the state control means can control the special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means can control the effect. It is common when the state control means controls the special state based on the fact that the special display result is derived and displayed, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the satisfaction of the special condition. The effect may be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 may display a common background image in the step 100 IWS 636 and the step 100 IWS 638). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the production in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is satisfied, which prevents an increase in development cost because a new production is not required. At the same time, the interest of the game can be improved because the player is not confused.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in the following (means 1d) to (means 4d).

(Means 1d) An advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step S25) and a variable display, which is a game machine that can be controlled to a state) and can control the game. (For example, as shown in FIG. 35, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIG. 36-31, step 108 IWS811 in the effect control CPU 120. The game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-17). In addition, step 100IWS166 in the game control computer 100, a part for executing step 100IWS173, and a part for executing step 100IWS537 in the game control computer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and variable display are executed. Based on this, when the numerical information can be updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) and the power supply is stopped. The state control means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and the state control means is special because the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. When the condition is satisfied, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, a portion in which step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 are executed in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 36-17. , The part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means depends on the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed. Numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means produces predetermined information when the power supply is started. It can be transmitted to the control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-11, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 for executing step 100 IWS11), and the effect control means receives power based on the reception of predetermined information. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed in a predetermined period after the supply is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-22, a portion where step 100 IWS630 is executed in the effect control CPU 120). And. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, and to increase the operating rate of the game machine.

In this example, the initial appearance is shown as a suggestion effect regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to execute a change in the background, an effect during fluctuation up to 100 rotations, and a suggestion effect by displaying on a demo screen or a menu screen.

When a command for specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 36-12) is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect. ..

(Means 2d) In the means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can identify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the effect control means when the power supply is started (for example, FIG. As shown in 36-11, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute step 100 IWS11). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, it is possible to give the player a motivation to play a game from the start of business of the game hall, increase the operating rate of the game machine, and suppress the increase in the processing load.

In this example, a command that can specify the value of the relief time reduction counter is transmitted at the time of recovery, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, 1 to 99 rotations can be specified in 100 rotation units, 100 to 199 rotations can be specified, ... 500 to 599 rotations can be specified, and so on. If the value of the time reduction counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but if it is 127 or less, a identifiable command may be transmitted.

(Means 3d) In means 1d or means 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in connection with the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-14). (Part of executing step 100 IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means can execute a special effect related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on specific information (a part that executes a special effect). For example, as shown in FIGS. 36-31), as specific information, it is possible to specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is equal to or less than a predetermined value. Second specific information that can specify that the difference between the first specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-9, the command for specifying the number of times of relief time 1) and the number of executions of the variable display and the special number is larger than a predetermined value. And (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-9, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured to include. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly causing a loss and preferably realize processing related to specific information.

In this example, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, is transmitted. I can't be limited. For example, when the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the number of special times is larger than a predetermined value, the second specific information, the relief time reduction number 2 specified command, may not be transmitted.

(Means 4d) In any of means 1d to means 3d, the effect control means is controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the first predetermined number of variable displays less than the special number of times. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect suggesting that (for example, as shown in FIGS. 36-33, a portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing step 100 IWS847, FIGS. 36-39 (I) to 36-40 (M). )), It is possible to execute the suggestion effect every time the variable display of the second predetermined number of times less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the variable display of the special number of times is executed (for example, in FIG. 36-31). As shown, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 100 IWS804 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 36-37 (A) to 36-38 (F). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting a function to a player, the risk of unknowingly causing a loss can be reduced.

In this example, the case where the effect is executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the relief time reduction counter.

Further, the features 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machines shown in (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2) shown below.

(Means 1e-1) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120). The effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIGS. 36-31, the effect control CPU 120. Step 108 (a portion for executing IWS811), and the game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, FIG. 36-17). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and the variable display are executed. When the power supply is stopped, and the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part where the step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above. In addition, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and backup storage including information regarding the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the means (for example, a portion for executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-14), and the state control means is an update means. When the special condition is satisfied, the numerical information updated by the player becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, so that the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Step 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 36-17, a part for executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. Is executed and the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed ), When the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized. , When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the stored contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and then the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition, and when the specific display result is controlled to the special state. It is characterized in that different effects are executed (for example, the portion shown in the modified example 2 and the modified example 3 in FIGS. 36-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) An advantageous advantageous state (for example,) based on the fact that the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed and the specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state) and a game control means capable of controlling the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 33, a portion that executes step S25 in the effect control CPU 120). The effect control means for controlling the effect corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 35, the portion of the effect control CPU 120 for executing steps S170 to S172, and as shown in FIGS. 36-31, the effect control CPU 120. Step 108 (a portion for executing IWS811), and the game control means can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than the normal state (for example, FIG. 36-17). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-19) and the variable display are executed. When the power supply is stopped, and the updating means (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the part where the step 100 IWS71 is executed in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above. In addition, a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of times the variable display is executed, and backup storage including information regarding the number of times the predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the means (for example, a portion for executing step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 36-14), and the state control means is an update means. When the special condition is satisfied, the numerical information updated by the player becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, so that the special state can be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, in the game control microcomputer 100. Step 100IWS74, a part for executing step 100IWS75, as shown in FIG. 36-17, a part for executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. Is executed and the numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 36-13, the portion where step 100 IWS 71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed ), When the effect control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized. , When the specific display result is derived and displayed after the stored contents of the backup storage means are initialized and then controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of the special condition, and after being controlled to the special state in It is characterized in that different effects are executed (for example, the portion shown in the modification 2 and the modification 3 of FIGS. 36-47). With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications are complicated. For example, since it is possible to grasp that the stored contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, factors such as guessing the set value are increased, and the fun of the game can be improved.

In this example, the case where only the fluctuation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured to be used with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables as in the case of after a big hit.

The configuration of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied to the feature portion 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually The state control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more easily executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. The state control means is a variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of, and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes the special number of times the variable display is executed. It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by becoming the corresponding specific value, and the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on the case, and there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state and a special advantageous state, and the advantageous state is controlled depending on which of the plurality of types is controlled. The advantage of the special state controlled after is different, and the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. , The advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1f in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the special advantageous state is the probability variation jackpot, the specific advantage state is the normal jackpot, and the time reduction state after the probability variation time reduction is the normal jackpot. The advantage may be higher than the time saving state of, and the time saving state of the relief time saving may be configured to have a higher advantage than the time saving state after the normal big hit.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, the advantageous state is obtained when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of the special advantage is different, and when the control is performed in the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered, the advantageous state is set. The number of times the variable display is executed for satisfying the special condition is the same as when it is controlled. According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 2f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (the time saving continues until the next big hit) is set to the first special symbol. And the 2nd special symbol are different, and 800 times, which is a condition to be controlled in a short relief time depending on whether the jackpot is controlled based on the 1st special symbol or the jackpot based on the 2nd special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the number of fluctuations of is common.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or means 2f, a disadvantage setting value in which the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is the first probability, and an advantage setting in which the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values including a value is provided, and a setting that is set to a disadvantage setting value has a special condition rather than a setting value that is set to an advantage setting value. The advantage of the special state, which is easy to hold and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". And, when it is set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1"), the number of fluctuations which is a condition for controlling the relief time is smaller than when it is set to an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"). However, the advantage in the relief time reduction may be configured to be higher than the advantage in the time reduction state after the big hit. It should be noted that the one set to the disadvantageous setting (for example, "1") has a higher relief time reduction arrival rate than the one set to the advantageous setting value (for example, "6"), and the relief time reduction is always shortened. Since the number of times is 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), the advantage may be higher than the time saving state via the big hit (for example, the time saving number is 100 times after the normal big hit).

(Means 4f) In any of means 1f to means 3f, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the set value is controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the special state advantage that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4f to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time saving states is controlled after the big hit is made common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in the relief time saving is also set when any setting value is set. May be configured to be common.

(Means 5f) In any of the means 1f to the means 4f, when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display, and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which of the multiple types is controlled to the advantageous state is different, and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5f in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, when a big hit is generated by the first special symbol and when a big hit is generated by the second special symbol. The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened depending on whether the relief time is controlled based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6f) In any of means 1f to means 5f, a variable display pattern is obtained from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, rather than a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state. When the display result of is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 6f is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 36-8 (E).

(Means 7f) In any one of means 1f to means 6f, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect is provided, and a variable display pattern is provided. The determination means is that the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 7f is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 36-8 (E).

(Means 8f) In any of means 1f to means 7f, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means can update the specific numerical information. It is possible to control the special state by setting the special information, and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. Based on this, a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the special state is terminated and the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. When the backup storage means is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means, the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8f initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 36-11, for example. The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured so as not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than a state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display, and a start condition are satisfied and a start condition is satisfied. Variable display execution means that can execute variable display based on the above, hold storage means that can store information about variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and power supply is stopped. When the data is set, the backup storage means that can hold the numerical information and the hold information, the initialization means that can initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the power supply are started. The state control means is provided with a recovery means capable of executing recovery control for recovering the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold storage means based on the stored contents of the backup storage means. , The numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and after the recovery control is executed. , It is possible to control the special state when the special condition is satisfied based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the recovered pending information, and the updating means is the case where the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages of the player while optimizing the control by initialization.

In order to apply the game machine of the means 1g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the relief time reduction counter and the hold memory are reset when the initialization process is executed, while the power failure is restored. The relief time reduction counter and the hold memory are restored, and when the fluctuation display corresponding to the hold memory at the time of restoration becomes the 800th fluctuation and the condition for controlling the relief time reduction is satisfied, the relief time reduction can be controlled. Just do it.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, the advantageous state is obtained when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. After being controlled, the ratio of being controlled to the special state of the special advantage is different, and when the control is performed in the advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when the variable display of the second identification information is triggered, the advantageous state is set. The number of times the variable display is executed for satisfying the special condition is the same as when it is controlled. According to such a configuration, the first identification information is variable while enhancing the interest by exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variablely displayed and the case where the second identification information is variablely displayed. Since the special number of times is common between the case of displaying and the case of performing variable display of the second identification information, it is possible to suppress an excessive increase in gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g in this feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the ratio of the special advantage in the time saving state after the big hit (the time saving continues until the next big hit) is set to the first special symbol. And the second special symbol are different, and when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special symbol, the variation that is the condition for controlling the relief time is shortened. It may be configured so that the number of times is common.

(Means 3g) In the means 1g or the means 2g, the disadvantage setting value in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is the first probability and the advantage setting in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state is higher than the first probability. A setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values including a value is provided, and a setting that is set to a disadvantage setting value has a special condition rather than a setting value that is set to an advantage setting value. The advantage of the special state, which is easy to hold and is controlled when the special condition is satisfied, is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when the disadvantage setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. By being higher than the advantage of the state, the player can be rescued more effectively.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the setting value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, when the setting is disadvantageous (for example, "1"), the number of fluctuations until the relief time is reduced and the relief time is shortened, as compared with the case where the setting value is advantageous (for example, "6"). The advantage of the above may be set to be higher than the advantage of the time saving state after the big hit. It should be noted that the setting of an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") has a higher probability of being out of order than the setting of an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"), so that the relief time is likely to be shortened. Since the relief time is always 800 times (substantially until the next big hit), it is more advantageous than the time saving state via the big hit (for example, after the normal big hit, the time reduction is 100 times). May be good.

(Means 4b) In any of means 1g to means 3g, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the means is controlled in an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the special state advantage that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement of gambling due to the set value, and it is possible to realize sound playability.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4g in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time saving states is controlled after the big hit is made common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in the relief time saving is also set when any setting value is set. May be configured to be common.

(Means 5g) In any of the means 1g to the means 4g, when the first identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display and when the second identification information is controlled in an advantageous state triggered by the variable display. The ratio of which of the multiple types is controlled to the advantageous state is different, and it corresponds to the case where the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information. Then, when the special condition is satisfied, the advantage of the special state controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same. According to such a configuration, while exhibiting different playability between the case where the first identification information is variably displayed and the case where the second identification information is variably displayed, it is controlled when a special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is common regardless of which set value is set, it is possible to obtain an appropriate degree of relief while suppressing the improvement of gambling.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 5g in this feature part 108IW and each modification, for example, when the big hit is generated by the first special symbol and when the big hit is generated by the second special symbol. The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the probabilistic jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened depending on whether the relief time is controlled based on the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It suffices to configure so that the advantages of are common.

(Means 6g) In any of the means 1g to the means 5g, a variable display pattern is obtained from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means for determining is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has a variable display in a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied, rather than a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state. When the display result of is a non-specific display result, the ratio of determining the shortened variable display pattern is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 6g is based on the structure which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 36-8 (E), for example.

(Means 7g) In any one of the means 1g to the means 6g, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to the execution of the reach effect is provided, and the variable display pattern is provided. The determination means is that the special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied is a non-specific display result when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state. The ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 7g is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the variation pattern table E of FIG. 36-8 (E).

(Means 8g) In any of the means 1g to the means 7g, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from the numerical information based on the variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means can update the specific numerical information. It is possible to control the special state by setting the special information, and it is possible to end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information. In the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. Based on this, a backup storage means capable of holding numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means even if the special state is terminated and the power supply is stopped, and setting information of the special information, and a predetermined condition are satisfied. When the backup storage means is provided with an initialization means capable of initializing the stored contents of the backup storage means, the initialization means initializes the setting information of special information and the specific numerical information when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, the degree of relief of the player can be increased even when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8g initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 36-11, for example. The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured so as not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derivation display of the specific display result, which is usually The state control means includes a state control means capable of controlling a special state in which variable display is more easily executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of variable display. The state control means is an update means. The numerical information updated by is a specific value corresponding to the special number of times of execution of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means is the variable of the first identification information. Numerical information is updated depending on whether the display is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the suggestion effect related to the establishment of the special condition is further provided, and the suggestion effect is provided. The execution means differs in the ratio of which of the plurality of effect modes the suggestion effect is executed according to the number of times the variable display is executed, and the effect mode of the suggestion effect suggests the period until the special condition is satisfied. It is a mode to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the production mode of the suggestion effect, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1h in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, whether or not to execute a countdown effect in an aspect suggesting the number of fluctuations which is a condition to be controlled in the relief time reduction. The ratio may be changed according to the count value of the relief time reduction counter. Further, the gaming machine of the means 1h can be realized by using, for example, the table shown in FIGS. 36-25, and determining whether or not the telop display while waiting for a customer is executed and the effect mode.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the effect mode of the suggestion effect is a mode in which the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied can be specified. According to such a configuration, the player can be clearly notified of the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied.

It should be noted that, in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown effect of an aspect suggesting the number of fluctuations which is a condition controlled to shorten the relief time.

(Means 3h) In the means 1h or the means 2h, the suggestion effect is an effect of displaying a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of a color and a size is different, and is displayed in any of the modes. The period until the suggested special conditions are met differs depending on whether or not it is done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the aspect of the specific image.

In addition, in this feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 3h is configured to determine whether or not to execute the telop display while waiting for a customer and the effect mode by using, for example, the table shown in FIG. 36-25. Originally. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers to be counted down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to be different according to the count value of the relief time reduction counter.

(Means 4h) In any of the means 1h to the means 3h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIG. 36-25 to determine whether or not to execute the telop display while waiting for a customer.

(Means 5h) In any of the means 1h to the means 4h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect execution means can execute the suggestion effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and the predetermined image is displayed according to the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 5h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIG. 36-25 to determine the effect mode of the telop display while waiting for customers.

(Means 6h) In any of the means 1h to the means 5h, the variable display executing means capable of executing the variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition, and the start condition are satisfied but the start condition is satisfied. A hold storage means that can store information related to variable display as hold information when it is not established, and a predetermined image that can display a predetermined image when the hold storage is not executed and the hold storage means does not store the variable display. The suggestion effect executing means includes at least one of the detection that the operation means is operated and the detection that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. Suggestive effects can be performed based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give a suggestion effect to the player who actually plays the game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the game machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 6h in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, when the demo state is entered, the gaming ball is operated by the operation of the ball striking operation handle (operation knob) 30 or at the starting port. When it is detected, it may be configured to execute a telop display suggesting the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is provided. The ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on which set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, means 7h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the telop display while waiting for a customer is executed by using the table shown in FIG. 36-25.

(Means 8h) In any of the means 1h to the means 7h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is provided, and the suggestion effect executing means is provided. Depending on which set value is set, the ratio of executing the suggestion effect differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, means 8h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the telop display is executed while waiting for a customer, and the effect mode, using the table shown in FIG. 36-25.

(Means 9h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h, a setting means capable of setting any set value from a plurality of set values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state, and a set value set. The setting suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect execution means are provided, and the ratio of executing the setting suggestion effect differs depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion is made. The effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the suggestion effect regardless of which set value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the presence or absence of execution of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complexity of control.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 9h to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute an effect suggesting a set value (for example, an effect in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value), the telop display waiting for a customer is executed regardless of which set value is set. It may be configured so that the ratio is common.

(Means 10h) In any of the means 1h to the means 6h and the means 9h, a setting means capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled in an advantageous state is set. The setting suggestion effect executing means that can execute the setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value is provided, and the setting suggestion effect execution means performs the setting suggestion effect according to a specific mode according to which setting value is set. The ratio of execution is different, and the ratio of executing the suggestion effect is the same regardless of which set value is set for the suggestion effect execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the complication of control.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 10h to the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, any one of a plurality of set values having different advantages for the player (in this example, the jackpot probability is different). It is possible to set the set value of, and execute the setting confirmation process and the setting change process when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, so that the current set value can be confirmed and the set value can be changed. For example, the setting can be changed in 6 stages of the setting values "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute an effect that suggests a set value (for example, an effect in which the execution ratio differs depending on the set value), no matter which set value is set, the customer is waiting in the red effect mode. It suffices to configure so that the execution ratio of the telop display of is common.

(Means 11h) In any of the means 1h to the means 10h, the suggestion effect executing means supplies power depending on whether the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started and the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by paying attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is executed, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In order to apply the gaming machine of the means 11c in the feature unit 108IW and each modification, for example, the execution ratio of the telop display and the countdown effect waiting for customers differs between after the initialization process and after the power failure is restored. It may be configured as follows.

(Means 12h) In any one of means 1h to 11h, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means has special conditions. When the special variable display pattern is satisfied, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and before the special condition is satisfied, the special variable display pattern is not determined, and when the variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed, the special state is set. Further provided is a specific notification effect execution means capable of executing a specific notification effect for notifying the fact that it is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special condition is controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the gaming state. Can be improved.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 12h is based on, for example, the configuration which uses the relief time saving variation deviation pattern table shown in FIG. 36-8 (I).

(Means 13h) In any of the means 1h to the means 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means can determine a specific variable display pattern regardless of whether the variable display display result is a specific display result or not. Yes, when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is the predetermined period. When the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than that of the previous period. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 13h is based on, for example, a configuration using the variation pattern table shown in FIGS. 36-8 (F) and 36-8 (G).

(Means 14h) In any one of the means 1h to the means 13h, a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect is provided. The execution means can execute the advance notice effect in both the case where the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result and the case where the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In the case, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is higher than in the case where the specific display result is not obtained, and the variable display is displayed in the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied than in the period before the predetermined period. When the result is not a specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of means 14h is based on the structure which determines whether or not the advance notice effect is executed, for example, by using the table shown in FIG. 36-32.

(Means 15h) In any of the means 1h to the means 14h, a notice effect executing means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed is provided, and the notice effect is provided. The execution means can execute the advance notice effect depending on the specific mode and the predetermined mode regardless of whether the display result of the variable display is the specific display result or not, and the variable display is displayed. When the result is a specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect in the specific mode is higher than that in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of executing the advance notice effect according to the specific mode is low. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest.

In the feature unit 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on, for example, using the table shown in FIGS. 36-32 to determine whether or not the advance notice effect is executed and the effect mode.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 10… General winning opening 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Hitting ball operation handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for production control
123… Display control unit 200… Dispensing device 202… First induction passage forming unit 201… Ball tank forming unit 203… First passage forming body 210… Terminal board 220… Cover body 271A to 271H… Holes 314,324,334 cover Part 340 ... Ball stopper member N1-6, 11-16 ... Screw member

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and controlling to an advantageous advantageous state when the specific display result is derived and displayed.
A storage unit that can store game media and
A payout unit that can pay out game media,
A guide passage forming portion having an open upper surface and forming a guide passage for guiding the game medium of the storage portion to the payout portion.
A cover portion provided so as to cover a part of the upper surface of the guide passage forming portion, and a cover portion.
A state control means that can control a special state in which variable display is easier to execute than the normal state,
An update method that can update numerical information based on the execution of variable display,
With
The cover portion is provided with a predetermined limiting portion for limiting the fall of the screw member that has fallen on the cover portion to the guide passage forming portion.
The guide passage forming portion is provided with a plurality of specific limiting portions for restricting the movement of the screw member that has fallen into the guide passage forming portion to the payout portion.
The state control means can control the special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times.
The updating means is a gaming machine characterized in that numerical information is updated depending on whether the variable display of the first identification information is executed or the variable display of the second identification information is executed.

Images